Zebra DS3508 Product Reference Guide


Add to my manuals
350 Pages

advertisement

Zebra DS3508 Product Reference Guide | Manualzz

DS3508 Digital Scanner

Product Reference Guide

DS3508 Digital Scanner

Product Reference Guide

72E-124801-11

Revision A

March 2017

ii DS3508 Product Reference Guide

No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form, or by any electrical or mechanical means, without permission in writing from Zebra. This includes electronic or mechanical means, such as photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval systems.

The material in this manual is subject to change without notice.

The software is provided strictly on an “as is” basis. All software, including firmware, furnished to the user is on a licensed basis. Zebra grants to the user a non-transferable and non-exclusive license to use each software or firmware program delivered hereunder (licensed program). Except as noted below, such license may not be assigned, sublicensed, or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of Zebra. No right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted, except as permitted under copyright law. The user shall not modify, merge, or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program material, create a derivative work from a licensed program, or use a licensed program in a network without written permission from Zebra. The user agrees to maintain Zebra’s copyright notice on the licensed programs delivered hereunder, and to include the same on any authorized copies it makes, in whole or in part. The user agrees not to decompile, disassemble, decode, or reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to the user or any portion thereof.

Zebra reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability, function, or design.

Zebra does not assume any product liability arising out of, or in connection with, the application or use of any product, circuit, or application described herein.

No license is granted, either expressly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise under any Zebra Technologies Corporation, intellectual property rights. An implied license only exists for equipment, circuits, and subsystems contained in Zebra products.

Zebra and the Zebra head graphic are registered trademarks of ZIH Corp. The Symbol logo is a registered trademark of Symbol

Technologies, Inc., a Zebra Technologies company. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

This media, or Zebra Product, may include Zebra Software, Commercial Third Party Software, and Publicly Available Software.

The Zebra Software that may be included on this media, or included in the Zebra Product, is Copyright (c) by Zebra Technologies

Corporation, and its use is subject to the licenses, terms and conditions of the agreement in force between the purchaser of the Zebra

Product and Zebra Technologies Corporation.

The Commercial Third Party Software that may be included on this media, or included in the Zebra Product, is subject to the licenses, terms and conditions of the agreement in force between the purchaser of the Zebra Product and Zebra Technologies Corporation, unless a separate Commercial Third Party Software License is included, in which case, your use of the Commercial Third Party Software will then be governed by the separate Commercial Third Party License.

The Publicly Available Software that may be included on this media, or in the Zebra Product, is listed below. The use of the listed Publicly

Available Software is subject to the licenses, terms and conditions of the agreement in force between the purchaser of the Zebra Product and Zebra Technologies Corporation, as well as, the terms and conditions of the license of each Publicly Available Software package.

Copies of the licenses for the listed Publicly Available Software, as well as, all attributions, acknowledgements, and software information details, are included below. Zebra is required to reproduce the software licenses, acknowledgments and copyright notices as provided by the Authors and Owners, thus, all such information is provided in its native language form, without modification or translation.

The Publicly Available Software in the list below is limited to the Publicly Available Software included by Zebra. The Publicly Available

Software included by Commercial Third Party Software or Products, that is used in the Zebra Product, are disclosed in the Commercial

Third Party Licenses, or via the respective Commercial Third Party Publicly Available Software Legal Notices.

Publicly available software list:

Name: Regular Expression Evaluator

Version: 8.3

Description: Compiles and executes regular expressions

Software Site:

Source Code:

License: http://www.freebsd.org/cgi/cvsweb.cgi/src/lib/libc/regex/

No Source Distribution Obligations. Zebra will not provide nor distribute the Source Code for the

Regular Expression Evaluator.

BSD Style License

© 1992 Henry Spencer.

© 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Henry Spencer of the University of Toronto. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:

This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.

4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING

NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Zebra Technologies Corporation

Lincolnshire, IL U.S.A.

http://www.zebra.com

.

Warranty

For the complete hardware product warranty statement, go to: http://www.zebra.com/warranty .

iii

iv DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Revision History

Changes to the original manual are listed below:

Change

-01 Rev A

-02 Rev A

-03 Rev A

-04 Rev A

-05 Rev A

-06 Rev A

-07 Rev A

-08 Rev A

-09 Rev A

-10 Rev A

-10 Rev B

-11 Rev A

Date

09/2009 Initial release.

Description

11/2009 Update:

- Presentation Mode Field of View’ bar codes

- Supported baud rates for RS232.

02/2010 Add UID.

Update DPM information.

04/2010 Remove reference to Synapse (not supported); remove Regulatory information as the complete Regulatory requirements appear in the Quick Start Guide; update IEC definition in Glossary.

03/2011 Add: Decode Pager Motor Duration, Fuzzy 1D Processing, PDF Prioritization,

Prioritization Timeout, Mobile Phone/Display Mode, CDC USB Com Port

Emulation, Cute, PDF417, Data Matrix, QR Codes, Aztec/Aztec Rune, Micro

PDF, Maxicode, Polling Interval, Quick Emulation, OCR, Coupon Report, Korean

3 of 5, Australian Post Format, Databar Limited Security Level.

Update: Nixdorf Mode A and B columns, Inverse 1D defaults, Inverse Data Matrix defaults.

Remove: Matrix 2 of 5 Redundancy.

2/2012 Add DS3508-ER configuration parameters: Trigger Modes, Torch Mode, Smart

LED Mode, Focus Modes. Add DS3508-ER decode zones and technical specifications.

3/2012 Add notes to indicate that the DS3508-ER and DS3508-DP do not support

Multicode Mode, and that the DS3508-ER does not support imaging preferences.

Add voltage and current specification for the DS3508-ER.

4/2012

8/2014 Add note to indicate that the DS3508-ER does not support OCR programming, change SSI parameter numbers to Attribute numbers.

12/2014 Zebra Rebranding.

3/2015 Zebra Rebranding/ removing Motorola.

3/2017 Remove OCR chapter (no longer supported); bar code name change (GS1

DataBar-14 to GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional.

Table of Contents

Warranty ........................................................................................................................ iii

Revision History ............................................................................................................. iv

About This Guide

Introduction .................................................................................................................... xv

Configurations................................................................................................................ xv

Chapter Descriptions ..................................................................................................... xvi

Notational Conventions.................................................................................................. xvii

Related Documents ....................................................................................................... xvii

Service Information ........................................................................................................ xviii

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 1-1

Interfaces ...................................................................................................................... 1-2

Unpacking ..................................................................................................................... 1-2

Setting Up the Digital Scanner ...................................................................................... 1-3

Installing the Interface Cable .................................................................................. 1-3

Removing the Interface Cable ................................................................................ 1-4

Connecting Power (if required) ............................................................................... 1-4

Configuring the Digital Scanner .............................................................................. 1-4

Accessories .................................................................................................................. 1-5

Required Accessories ............................................................................................. 1-5

Optional Accessories .............................................................................................. 1-5

Chapter 2: Scanning

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 2-1

Beeper Definitions ........................................................................................................ 2-2

LED Definitions ............................................................................................................. 2-4

Scanning ....................................................................................................................... 2-5

Presentation Mode (DS3508-SR/HD/DP) ............................................................... 2-5

Hand-Held Scanning ............................................................................................... 2-6

vi DS3508 Product Reference Guide

DS3508-SR/HD/DP Aiming ..................................................................................... 2-7

Decode Ranges ............................................................................................................ 2-9

DS3508-SR/HD/DP ................................................................................................. 2-9

DS3508-ER ............................................................................................................. 2-10

Chapter 3: Maintenance & Technical Specifications

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 3-1

Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 3-1

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 3-2

Technical Specifications ............................................................................................... 3-5

Digital Scanner Signal Descriptions .............................................................................. 3-7

Chapter 4: User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 4-1

Scanning Sequence Examples ..................................................................................... 4-2

Errors While Scanning .................................................................................................. 4-2

User Preferences/Miscellaneous Options Parameter Defaults ..................................... 4-2

User Preferences .......................................................................................................... 4-5

Set Default Parameter ............................................................................................ 4-5

Parameter Bar Code Scanning ............................................................................... 4-6

Decode Pager Motor ............................................................................................... 4-7

Trigger Mode ........................................................................................................... 4-9

Beep After Good Decode ........................................................................................ 4-11

Beeper Volume ....................................................................................................... 4-11

Beeper Tone ........................................................................................................... 4-12

Beeper Duration ...................................................................................................... 4-13

Suppress Power-up Beeps ..................................................................................... 4-13

Hands-Free Mode ................................................................................................... 4-14

Presentation Performance Mode ............................................................................ 4-14

Digital Scanner Activity Modes ............................................................................... 4-15

Fuzzy 1D Processing .............................................................................................. 4-23

Picklist Mode ........................................................................................................... 4-24

PDF Prioritization .................................................................................................... 4-25

PDF Prioritization Timeout ...................................................................................... 4-26

DPM Scanning ........................................................................................................ 4-27

Continuous Bar Code Read .................................................................................... 4-28

Decode Session Timeout ........................................................................................ 4-28

Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol ............................................................ 4-29

Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols ...................................................... 4-29

Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern ......................................................................... 4-30

Hands-Free Decode Aiming Pattern ....................................................................... 4-31

Presentation Mode Field of View ............................................................................ 4-32

Mobile Phone/Display Mode ................................................................................... 4-33

Decoding Illumination (Hand-Held Mode only) ....................................................... 4-34

Torch Mode (DS3508-ER Only) .............................................................................. 4-35

Smart LED Mode (DS3508-ER Only) ..................................................................... 4-36

Focus Mode ............................................................................................................ 4-37

Multicode Mode (DS3508-SR / DS3508-HD) .......................................................... 4-38

Table of Contents vii

Multicode Expression (DS3508-SR / DS3508-HD) ................................................. 4-39

Multicode Mode Concatenation (DS3508-SR / DS3508-HD) ................................. 4-44

Multicode Concatenation Symbology (DS3508-SR / DS3508-HD) ......................... 4-45

Multicode Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 4-46

Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters ............................................................................. 4-48

Transmit Code ID Character ................................................................................... 4-48

Prefix/Suffix Values ................................................................................................. 4-49

Scan Data Transmission Format ............................................................................ 4-50

FN1 Substitution Values ......................................................................................... 4-51

Scan Data Transmission Format (continued) ......................................................... 4-51

Transmit “No Read” Message ................................................................................. 4-52

UID Parsing ............................................................................................................. 4-53

Chapter 5: Imaging Preferences

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 5-1

Scanning Sequence Examples ..................................................................................... 5-2

Errors While Scanning .................................................................................................. 5-2

Imaging Preferences Parameter Defaults ..................................................................... 5-2

Imaging Preferences ..................................................................................................... 5-4

Operational Modes .................................................................................................. 5-4

Image Capture Illumination ..................................................................................... 5-5

Gain/Exposure Priority for Snapshot Mode ............................................................. 5-6

Snapshot Mode Timeout ......................................................................................... 5-7

Snapshot Aiming Pattern ........................................................................................ 5-7

Image Cropping ...................................................................................................... 5-8

Crop to Pixel Addresses ......................................................................................... 5-9

Image Size (Number of Pixels) ............................................................................... 5-10

Image Brightness (Target White) ............................................................................ 5-11

JPEG Image Options .............................................................................................. 5-11

JPEG Target File Size ............................................................................................ 5-12

JPEG Quality and Size Value ................................................................................. 5-12

Image Enhancement ............................................................................................... 5-13

Image File Format Selector ..................................................................................... 5-14

Bits Per Pixel ........................................................................................................... 5-15

Signature Capture ................................................................................................... 5-16

Signature Capture File Format Selector ................................................................. 5-17

Signature Capture Bits Per Pixel ............................................................................ 5-18

Signature Capture Width ......................................................................................... 5-19

Signature Capture Height ....................................................................................... 5-19

Signature Capture JPEG Quality ............................................................................ 5-19

Video View Finder ................................................................................................... 5-20

Video View Finder Image Size ................................................................................ 5-20

Chapter 6: USB Interface

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 6-1

Connecting a USB Interface ......................................................................................... 6-2

USB Parameter Defaults .............................................................................................. 6-3

USB Host Parameters .................................................................................................. 6-4

viii DS3508 Product Reference Guide

USB Device Type .................................................................................................... 6-4

Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status Handshaking ................................................... 6-5

USB Country Keyboard Types - Country Codes ..................................................... 6-6

USB Keystroke Delay ............................................................................................. 6-8

USB CAPS Lock Override ...................................................................................... 6-8

USB Ignore Unknown Characters ........................................................................... 6-9

Emulate Keypad ...................................................................................................... 6-9

Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero ........................................................................ 6-10

USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution ............................................................................ 6-10

Function Key Mapping ............................................................................................ 6-11

Simulated Caps Lock .............................................................................................. 6-11

Convert Case .......................................................................................................... 6-12

USB Static CDC ...................................................................................................... 6-12

USB Polling Interval ................................................................................................ 6-13

Quick Keypad Emulation ......................................................................................... 6-15

ASCII Character Set for USB ........................................................................................ 6-16

Chapter 7: RS-232 Interface

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 7-1

Connecting an RS-232 Interface .................................................................................. 7-2

RS-232 Parameter Defaults .......................................................................................... 7-3

RS-232 Host Parameters .............................................................................................. 7-4

RS-232 Host Types ................................................................................................. 7-6

Baud Rate ............................................................................................................... 7-8

Parity ....................................................................................................................... 7-9

Data Bits ................................................................................................................. 7-9

Stop Bit Select ........................................................................................................ 7-10

Check Receive Errors ............................................................................................. 7-10

Hardware Handshaking .......................................................................................... 7-11

Software Handshaking ............................................................................................ 7-13

Host Serial Response Time-out .............................................................................. 7-15

RTS Line State ........................................................................................................ 7-16

Beep on <BEL> ....................................................................................................... 7-16

Intercharacter Delay ................................................................................................ 7-17

Nixdorf Beep/LED Options ...................................................................................... 7-18

Ignore Unknown Characters ................................................................................... 7-18

ASCII Character Set for RS-232 ................................................................................... 7-19

Chapter 8: IBM 468X / 469X Interface

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 8-1

Connecting to an IBM 468X/469X Host ........................................................................ 8-2

IBM Parameter Defaults ............................................................................................... 8-3

IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters ................................................................................. 8-4

Port Address ........................................................................................................... 8-4

Convert Unknown to Code 39 ................................................................................. 8-5

Table of Contents ix

Chapter 9: Keyboard Wedge Interface

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 9-1

Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface ..................................................................... 9-2

Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults .......................................................................... 9-3

Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters .............................................................................. 9-4

Keyboard Wedge Host Types ................................................................................. 9-4

Keyboard Wedge Country Types - Country Codes ................................................. 9-5

Ignore Unknown Characters ................................................................................... 9-7

Keystroke Delay ...................................................................................................... 9-7

Intra-Keystroke Delay ............................................................................................. 9-8

Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation ..................................................................... 9-8

Caps Lock On ......................................................................................................... 9-9

Caps Lock Override ................................................................................................ 9-9

Convert Wedge Data .............................................................................................. 9-10

Function Key Mapping ............................................................................................ 9-10

FN1 Substitution ..................................................................................................... 9-11

Send Make and Break ............................................................................................ 9-11

Keyboard Maps ....................................................................................................... 9-12

ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge ................................................................... 9-13

Chapter 10: Symbologies

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 10-1

Scanning Sequence Examples ..................................................................................... 10-1

Errors While Scanning .................................................................................................. 10-2

Symbology Parameter Defaults .................................................................................... 10-2

UPC/EAN ...................................................................................................................... 10-7

Enable/Disable UPC-A ............................................................................................ 10-7

Enable/Disable UPC-E ............................................................................................ 10-7

Enable/Disable UPC-E1 .......................................................................................... 10-8

Enable/Disable EAN-8/JAN-8 ................................................................................. 10-8

Enable/Disable EAN-13/JAN-13 ............................................................................. 10-9

Enable/Disable Bookland EAN ............................................................................... 10-9

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals .................................................................. 10-10

User-Programmable Supplementals ....................................................................... 10-13

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy ............................................................ 10-13

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format ......................................................... 10-14

Transmit UPC-A Check Digit .................................................................................. 10-14

Transmit UPC-E Check Digit .................................................................................. 10-15

Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit ................................................................................ 10-15

UPC-A Preamble .................................................................................................... 10-16

UPC-E Preamble .................................................................................................... 10-17

UPC-E1 Preamble .................................................................................................. 10-18

Convert UPC-E to UPC-A ....................................................................................... 10-19

Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A ..................................................................................... 10-19

EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend .............................................................................................. 10-20

Bookland ISBN Format ........................................................................................... 10-21

UCC Coupon Extended Code ................................................................................. 10-22

Coupon Report ........................................................................................................ 10-23

ISSN EAN ............................................................................................................... 10-24

x DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Code 128 ...................................................................................................................... 10-25

Enable/Disable Code 128 ....................................................................................... 10-25

Set Lengths for Code 128 ....................................................................................... 10-25

Enable/Disable GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) ................................................ 10-26

Enable/Disable ISBT 128 ........................................................................................ 10-27

ISBT Concatenation ................................................................................................ 10-28

Check ISBT Table ................................................................................................... 10-29

ISBT Concatenation Redundancy ........................................................................... 10-29

Code 39 ........................................................................................................................ 10-30

Enable/Disable Code 39 ......................................................................................... 10-30

Enable/Disable Trioptic Code 39 ............................................................................ 10-30

Convert Code 39 to Code 32 .................................................................................. 10-31

Code 32 Prefix ........................................................................................................ 10-31

Set Lengths for Code 39 ......................................................................................... 10-32

Code 39 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................ 10-33

Transmit Code 39 Check Digit ................................................................................ 10-33

Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion .............................................................................. 10-34

Code 39 Buffering - Scan & Store ........................................................................... 10-34

Code 93 ........................................................................................................................ 10-37

Enable/Disable Code 93 ......................................................................................... 10-37

Set Lengths for Code 93 ......................................................................................... 10-37

Code 11 ........................................................................................................................ 10-39

Code 11 .................................................................................................................. 10-39

Set Lengths for Code 11 ......................................................................................... 10-39

Code 11 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................ 10-41

Transmit Code 11 Check Digits .............................................................................. 10-42

Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) ................................................................................................. 10-42

Enable/Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 ........................................................................... 10-42

Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 ........................................................................... 10-43

I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................... 10-45

Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit ................................................................................... 10-45

Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 ...................................................................................... 10-46

Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF) .................................................................................................... 10-46

Enable/Disable Discrete 2 of 5 ................................................................................ 10-46

Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 ............................................................................... 10-47

Codabar (NW - 7) ......................................................................................................... 10-49

Enable/Disable Codabar ......................................................................................... 10-49

Set Lengths for Codabar ......................................................................................... 10-49

CLSI Editing ............................................................................................................ 10-51

NOTIS Editing ......................................................................................................... 10-51

MSI ............................................................................................................................... 10-52

Enable/Disable MSI ................................................................................................ 10-52

Set Lengths for MSI ................................................................................................ 10-52

MSI Check Digits .................................................................................................... 10-54

Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) ................................................................................... 10-54

MSI Check Digit Algorithm ...................................................................................... 10-55

Chinese 2 of 5 ............................................................................................................... 10-55

Enable/Disable Chinese 2 of 5 ................................................................................ 10-55

Matrix 2 of 5 .................................................................................................................. 10-56

Enable/Disable Matrix 2 of 5 ................................................................................... 10-56

Table of Contents xi

Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 ................................................................................... 10-57

Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit ......................................................................................... 10-58

Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit .......................................................................... 10-58

Korean 3 of 5 ................................................................................................................ 10-59

Enable/Disable Korean 3 of 5 ................................................................................. 10-59

Inverse 1D .................................................................................................................... 10-60

Postal Codes ................................................................................................................ 10-61

US Postnet .............................................................................................................. 10-61

US Planet ................................................................................................................ 10-61

Transmit US Postal Check Digit .............................................................................. 10-62

UK Postal ................................................................................................................ 10-62

Transmit UK Postal Check Digit .............................................................................. 10-63

Japan Postal ........................................................................................................... 10-63

Australia Post .......................................................................................................... 10-64

Australia Post Format ............................................................................................. 10-65

Netherlands KIX Code ........................................................................................... 10-66

USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail ..................................................................... 10-66

UPU FICS Postal .................................................................................................... 10-67

GS1 DataBar ................................................................................................................ 10-68

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14) ..................................... 10-68

GS1 DataBar Limited .............................................................................................. 10-68

GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level ...................................................................... 10-69

GS1 DataBar Expanded ......................................................................................... 10-70

Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN ........................................................................ 10-70

Composite ..................................................................................................................... 10-71

Composite CC-C ..................................................................................................... 10-71

Composite CC-A/B .................................................................................................. 10-71

Composite TLC-39 .................................................................................................. 10-72

UPC Composite Mode ............................................................................................ 10-72

Composite Beep Mode ........................................................................................... 10-73

GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes ................................... 10-73

2D Symbologies ............................................................................................................ 10-74

Enable/Disable PDF417 .......................................................................................... 10-74

Enable/Disable MicroPDF417 ................................................................................. 10-74

Code 128 Emulation ............................................................................................... 10-75

Data Matrix .............................................................................................................. 10-76

Data Matrix Inverse ................................................................................................. 10-77

Maxicode ................................................................................................................. 10-78

QR Code ................................................................................................................. 10-78

QR Inverse .............................................................................................................. 10-79

MicroQR .................................................................................................................. 10-79

Aztec ....................................................................................................................... 10-80

Aztec Inverse .......................................................................................................... 10-80

Redundancy Level ........................................................................................................ 10-81

Redundancy Level 1 ............................................................................................... 10-81

Redundancy Level 2 ............................................................................................... 10-81

Redundancy Level 3 ............................................................................................... 10-81

Redundancy Level 4 ............................................................................................... 10-82

Security Level ............................................................................................................... 10-83

Intercharacter Gap Size .......................................................................................... 10-84

xii DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Report Version .............................................................................................................. 10-84

Macro PDF Features .................................................................................................... 10-85

Flush Macro Buffer .................................................................................................. 10-85

Abort Macro PDF Entry ........................................................................................... 10-85

Chapter 11: 123Scan2

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 11-1

Communication with 123Scan2 .................................................................................... 11-1

123Scan2 Requirements .............................................................................................. 11-2

Scanner SDK, Other Software Tools, and Videos ........................................................ 11-2

Chapter 12: Advanced Data Formatting

Introduction ................................................................................................................... 12-1

Appendix A: Standard Default Parameters

Appendix B: Programming Reference

Symbol Code Identifiers ................................................................................................ B-1

AIM Code Identifiers ..................................................................................................... B-3

Appendix C: Sample Bar Codes

Code 39 ........................................................................................................................ C-1

UPC/EAN ...................................................................................................................... C-1

UPC-A, 100% .......................................................................................................... C-1

EAN-13, 100% ........................................................................................................ C-2

Code 128 ...................................................................................................................... C-2

Interleaved 2 of 5 .......................................................................................................... C-2

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14) .......................................... C-3

PDF417 ......................................................................................................................... C-3

Data Matrix ................................................................................................................... C-3

Maxicode ...................................................................................................................... C-4

QR Code ....................................................................................................................... C-4

US Postnet .................................................................................................................... C-4

UK Postal ...................................................................................................................... C-4

Appendix D: Numeric Bar Codes

Numeric Bar Codes ...................................................................................................... D-1

Cancel ........................................................................................................................... D-2

Table of Contents xiii

Appendix E: ASCII Character Sets

Appendix F: Signature Capture Code

Introduction ................................................................................................................... F-1

Code Structure .............................................................................................................. F-1

Signature Capture Area .......................................................................................... F-1

CapCode Pattern Structure ..................................................................................... F-2

Start / Stop Patterns ..................................................................................................... F-2

Dimensions ................................................................................................................... F-3

Data Format .................................................................................................................. F-3

Additional Capabilities .................................................................................................. F-4

Signature Boxes ........................................................................................................... F-4

Glossary

Index

Tell Us What You Think... 7

xiv DS3508 Product Reference Guide

About This Guide

Introduction

The DS3508 Product Reference Guide provides general instructions for setting up, operating, maintaining, and troubleshooting the DS3508 digital scanner.

Configurations

This guide includes the following configurations:

• DS3508-SR20005R – DS3508 digital scanner, standard range

• DS3508-HD20005R – DS3508 digital scanner, high density focus

• DS3508-DP20005R – DS3508 digital scanner, DPM

• DS3508-ER20005R - DS3508 digital scanner, extended range

xvi DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Chapter Descriptions

Topics covered in this guide are as follows:

Chapter 1, Getting Started provides a product overview, unpacking instructions, and cable connection

information.

Chapter 2, Scanning describes parts of the digital scanner, beeper and LED definitions, and how to use the

scanner in hand-held and hands-free (presentation) modes.

Chapter 3, Maintenance & Technical Specifications provides information on how to care for the digital

scanner, troubleshooting, and technical specifications.

Chapter 4, User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options

describes features frequently used to customize how data transmits to the host device and programming bar codes for selecting user preference features for the digital scanner.

Chapter 5, Imaging Preferences

provides imaging preference features and programming bar codes for selecting these features. Note that the DS3508-ER does not support these features.

Chapter 6, USB Interface

describes how to set up the digital scanner with a USB host.

Chapter 7, RS-232 Interface

describes how to set up the digital scanner with an RS-232 host, such as point-of-sale devices, host computers, or other devices with an available RS-232 port.

Chapter 8, IBM 468X / 469X Interface describes how to set up the digital scanner with IBM 468X/469X POS

systems.

Chapter 9, Keyboard Wedge Interface

describes how to set up a Keyboard Wedge interface with the digital scanner.

Chapter 10, Symbologies

describes all symbology features and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features for the digital scanner.

Chapter 11, 123Scan2 (PC based scanner configuration tool) enables rapid and easy customized setup of

Zebra Scanners.

Chapter 12, Advanced Data Formatting

briefly describes ADF, a means of customizing data before transmission to the host device, and includes a reference to the ADF Programmer Guide .

Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters

provides a table of all host devices and miscellaneous scanner defaults.

Appendix B, Programming Reference

provides a table of AIM code identifiers, ASCII character conversions, and keyboard maps.

Appendix C, Sample Bar Codes

includes sample bar codes of various code types.

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes includes the numeric bar codes to scan for parameters requiring specific

numeric values.

Appendix E, ASCII Character Sets provides ASCII character value tables.

Appendix F, Signature Capture Code provides information on CapCode, a signature capture code that

encloses a signature area on a document and allows a scanner to capture a signature.

About This Guide xvii

Notational Conventions

The following conventions are used in this document:

• Italics are used to highlight the following:

• Chapters and sections in this and related documents

• Dialog box, window and screen names

• Drop-down list and list box names

• Check box and radio button names

• Bold text is used to highlight the following:

• Key names on a keypad

• Button names on a screen.

• bullets (•) indicate:

• Action items

• Lists of alternatives

• Lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential

• Sequential lists (e.g., those that describe step-by-step procedures) appear as numbered lists.

• Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (

*

) are used to denote default parameter settings.

*

Indicates Default

*

Baud Rate 9600 Feature/Option

Related Documents

• DS3508 Quick Start Guide , p/n 72-124802-xx - provides general information for getting started with the

DS3508 digital scanner, and includes basic set up and operation instructions.

For the latest version of all guides, go to: http://www.zebra.com/support .

xviii DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Service Information

If you have a problem using the equipment, contact your facility's technical or systems support. If there is a problem with the equipment, they will contact the Zebra Global Customer Support Center at: http://www.zebra.com/support .

When contacting Zebra support, please have the following information available:

• Serial number of the unit

• Model number or product name

• Software type and version number

Zebra responds to calls by e-mail, telephone or fax within the time limits set forth in service agreements.

If your problem cannot be solved by Zebra Support, you may need to return your equipment for servicing and will be given specific directions. Zebra is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the approved shipping container is not used. Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty.

If you purchased your product from a Zebra business partner, please contact that business partner for support.

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Introduction

The DS3508 combines superior 1D and 2D omnidirectional bar code scanning and sub-second image capture and transfer with a light-weight, hands-free/hand-held design. The digital scanner accommodates both hands-free use

(in the scan stand) and hand-held use. Whether in hands-free (presentation) or hand-held mode, the digital scanner ensures comfort and ease of use for extended periods of time.

Figure 1-1 DS3508 Digital Scanner

NOTE Hands-free (presentation) scanning does not apply to the DS3508-ER configuration.

1 - 2 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Interfaces

The DS3508 digital scanner supports:

• USB connection to a host. The digital scanner autodetects a USB host and defaults to the HID keyboard interface type. Select other USB interface types by scanning programming bar code menus.This interface supports the following international keyboards (for Windows® environment): North America, German,

French, French Canadian, Spanish, Italian, Swedish, UK English, Portuguese-Brazilian, and Japanese.

• Standard RS-232 connection to a host. Scan bar code menus to set up communication of the digital scanner with the host.

• Connection to IBM 468X/469X hosts. Scan bar code menus to set up communication of the digital scanner with the IBM terminal.

• Keyboard Wedge connection to a host. The host interprets scanned data as keystrokes. Scan bar code menus to set up communication of the digital scanner with the host. This interface supports the following international keyboards (for Windows® environment): North America, German, French, French Canadian,

French Belgian, Spanish, Italian, Swedish, UK English, Portuguese-Brazilian, and Japanese.

Unpacking

Remove the digital scanner from its packing and inspect it for damage. If the scanner was damaged in transit,

contact Zebra Support. See page xviii

for contact information. KEEP THE PACKING . It is the approved shipping container; use this to return the equipment for servicing.

Getting Started 1 - 3

Setting Up the Digital Scanner

Installing the Interface Cable

NOTE Different hosts require different cables. The connectors illustrated in each host chapter are examples only.

Connectors vary from those illustrated, but the steps to connect the digital scanner are the same.

1.

Loosen the two screws on the cable clamp at the bottom of the scanner and gently pull the clamp away from the bottom of the scanner.

Figure 1-2 Removing the Cable Clamp

2.

Open the clamp and plug the interface cable modular connector into the cable interface port on the bottom of the scanner handle.

Figure 1-3 Inserting the Interface Cable

3.

Gently tug the cable to ensure the connector is properly secured.

1 - 4 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

4.

Close the clamp, push it back into place and tighten the screws on the clamp to secure the cable into the bottom of the scanner.

Figure 1-4 Closing the Cable Clamp

5.

Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host (see the specific host chapter for information on host connections).

Removing the Interface Cable

1.

Loosen the two screws on the cable clamp at the bottom of the scanner and gently pull the clamp away from the bottom of the scanner.

2.

Open the clamp and unplug the interface cable modular connector from the cable interface port on the bottom of the scanner handle. Carefully slide out the cable.

3.

Follow the steps for Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-3

to connect a new cable.

Connecting Power (if required)

If the host does not provide power to the digital scanner, connect an external power supply:

1.

Connect the interface cable to the base of the digital scanner, as described in

Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-3

.

2.

Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host (refer to the host manual to locate the correct port).

3.

Plug the power supply into the power jack on the interface cable. Plug the other end of the power supply into an AC outlet.

Configuring the Digital Scanner

To configure the digital scanner use the bar codes included in this manual. See

Chapter 4, User Preferences &

Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options

and Chapter 5, Imaging Preferences for information about programming the

digital scanner using bar code menus. Also see each host-specific chapter to set up connection to a specific host type.

Getting Started 1 - 5

Accessories

Required Accessories

The digital scanner requires an interface cable and may require a power supply. These items can be purchased from Zebra.

Optional Accessories

Contact Zebra to purchase the optional accessories in Table 1-1

for the DS3508.

Table 1-1 Optional Accessories

Accessory

Scanner Belt Holster

Intellistand for DS3508

Desk Top Holder

Multi-Mount Stand

Tool Balancer

Part Number

11-35035-01R

20-54090-07R (see page 2-5

).

20-67176-01R

12-44267-01R

50-15400-03

1 - 6 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Scanning

Introduction

This chapter provides beeper and LED definitions, techniques involved in scanning bar codes, general instructions and tips about scanning, and decode zone diagrams.

Scan Window

Tether Plate

LED

Indicators

Scan Trigger

Figure 2-1 Parts

2 - 2 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Beeper Definitions

The digital scanner issues different beep sequences and patterns to indicate status. Table 2-1

defines beep sequences that occur during both normal scanning and while programming the digital scanner.

Table 2-1 Beeper Definitions

Beeper Sequence Indication

Standard Use

Low/medium/high beeps

Short high beep

4 long low beeps

5 low beeps

Power up.

A bar code symbol was decoded (if decode beeper is enabled).

Transmission error.

Conversion or format error.

Low/low/low/extra low beeps RS-232 receive error.

High beep

Image Capture

The digital scanner detected a <BEL> character over RS-232.

Low beep

High/low beeps

Parameter Menu Scanning

Low/high beeps

Snapshot mode started or completed.

Snapshot mode timed out.

High/low beeps

High/low/high/low beeps

Code 39 Buffering

High/low beeps

Input error; incorrect bar code, programming sequence, or Cancel scanned.

Keyboard parameter selected. Enter value using numeric bar codes.

Successful program exit with change in parameter setting.

3 long high beeps

High/low/high beeps

Low/high/low beeps

New Code 39 data was entered into the buffer.

Code 39 buffer is full.

The Code 39 buffer was erased.

The Code 39 buffer was erased or there was an attempt to clear or transmit an empty buffer.

A successful transmission of buffered data.

Low/high beeps

Macro PDF

2 low beeps

MPDF sequence buffered.

2 long low beeps

3 long low beeps

File ID error. A bar code not in the current MPDF sequence was scanned.

Out of memory. There is not enough buffer space to store the current MPDF symbol.

Scanning 2 - 3

Table 2-1 Beeper Definitions (Continued)

Beeper Sequence

4 long low beeps

Indication

Bad symbology. Scanned a 1D or 2D bar code in a MPDF sequence, a duplicate

MPDF label, a label in an incorrect order, or trying to transmit an empty or illegal

MPDF field.

5 long low beeps

Fast warble beep

Low/high beeps

Host Specific

Flushing MPDF buffer.

Aborting MPDF sequence.

Flushing an already empty MPDF buffer.

USB only

4 short high beeps The digital scanner has not completed initialization. Wait several seconds and scan again.

Low/medium/high beeps upon scanning a USB device type

Communication with the host must be established before the digital scanner can operate at the highest power level.

Low/medium/high beeps occur more than once

The USB host can put the digital scanner in a state where power to the scanner is cycled on and off more than once. This is normal and usually happens when the

PC cold boots.

RS-232 only

1 short high beep A <BEL> character is received and Beep on <BEL> is enabled.

2 - 4 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

LED Definitions

In addition to beep sequences, the digital scanner uses a two-color LED to indicate status.

Table 2-2 defines LED

colors that display during scanning.

Table 2-2 Standard LED Definitions

LED Indication

Hand-Held Scanning Standard Use

Green A bar code was successfully decoded.

Red

Off

Transmission error, conversion or format error, or RS-232 receive error.

No power is applied to the digital scanner, or the scanner is on and ready to scan.

Presentation (Hands-Free) Scanning Standard Use

Green The scanner is on and ready to scan.

Momentarily Off

Red

A bar code was successfully decoded.

Transmission error, conversion or format error, or RS-232 receive error.

Off

Parameter Programming

No power is applied to the digital scanner, or the scanner is in low power mode.

Green

Red

ADF Programming

Number expected. Enter value using numeric bar codes.

Successful program exit with change in parameter setting.

Input error: incorrect bar code, programming sequence, or Cancel scanned.

Green

Blinking Green

Green after Blinking

Red

Enter another digit. Add leading zeros to the front if necessary.

Enter another alphabetic character or scan the End of Message bar code.

All criteria or actions cleared for current rule, continue entering rule.

Delete last saved rule. The current rule is left intact.

All rules deleted.

Enter another criterion or action, or scan the Save Rule bar code.

Rule saved. Rule entry mode exited.

Cancel rule entry. Rule entry mode exited because of an error or the user asked to exit rule entry.

Out of rule memory. Erase some existing rules, then try to save rule again.

Entry error, wrong bar code scanned, or criteria/action list is too long for a rule. Re-enter criterion or action.

Scanning 2 - 5

Scanning

The DS3508 has a built-in, light-weight stand to easily accommodate both hands-free (presentation) and hand-held scanning.

NOTE Certain areas of the digital scanner’s handle may feel warm at times. This is normal.

NOTE Hands-free (presentation) scanning does not apply to the DS3508-ER configuration.

Presentation Mode (DS3508-SR/HD/DP)

The optional Intellistand adds greater flexibility to scanning operation. When you place the digital scanner in the stand’s “cup,” the scanner’s built-in sensor places the scanner in presentation (hands-free) mode. When you remove the digital scanner from the stand it operates in its normal hand-held mode.

Scanner “Cup”

Adjust angle of scanner “cup”

Adjust height of

IntelliStand

Figure 2-2 Scanning in Hands-Free Mode

To operate the digital scanner in the Intellistand:

1.

Connect the digital scanner to the host (see the appropriate host chapter for information on host connections).

2.

Insert the digital scanner in the Intellistand by placing the front of the digital scanner into the stand’s “cup” (see

Figure 2-2

).

3.

Use the Intellistand’s adjustment knobs to adjust the height and angle of the digital scanner.

4.

Center the symbol in the aiming pattern.

2 - 6 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

5.

Upon successful decode, the digital scanner beeps and the LED turns green. For more information on beeper and LED definitions, see

Table 2-1 on page 2-2

and Table 2-2 on page 2-4

.

NOTE Hands-free (presentation) scanning does not apply to the DS3508-ER configuration.

Hand-Held Scanning

Aim the digital scanner at a bar code and pull the trigger to decode.

Figure 2-3 Scanning in Hand-Held Mode: DS3508-SR/HD/DP

Figure 2-4 Scanning in Hand-Held Mode: DS3508-ER

Scanning 2 - 7

DS3508-SR/HD/DP Aiming

When scanning, the DS3508-SR/HD/DP projects a red laser aiming pattern which allows positioning the bar code

within its field of view. See Decode Ranges on page 2-9 for the proper distance to achieve between the digital

scanner and a bar code.

Figure 2-5 DS3508-SR/HD/DP Aiming Pattern

If necessary, the digital scanner turns on its red LEDs to illuminate the target bar code.To scan a bar code, center the symbol in any orientation within the aiming pattern. Be sure the entire symbol is within the rectangular area formed by the cross pattern.

1D bar code symbol 2D bar code symbol 2D dot peen DPM symbol

Aiming Pattern

Figure 2-6 Scanning Orientation with Aiming Pattern

NOTE Scanning Direct Part Mark (DPM) bar codes with the DS3508-DP20005R digital scanner: Due to the reflective nature of some surfaces used with DPM bar codes (see

Figure 2-6 ), it may be necessary to tilt

the scanner at an angle relative to the target (Zebra recommends 25-45 degrees). For example, when scanning a 15 mil dot peen Data matrix bar code marked on an aluminum surface with the

DS3508-DP20005R, present the target between two and three inches from the nose of the scanner, and tilt the scanner at a 30 degree angle.

When scanning standard (non-DPM) bar codes with any configuration of the DS3508 digital scanner, follow the standard aiming instructions described in

DS3508-SR/HD/DP Aiming on page 2-7

.

2 - 8 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

The digital scanner can also read a bar code presented within the aiming pattern but not centered. The top

examples in Figure 2-7

show acceptable aiming options, while the bottom examples can not be decoded.

0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5

0 1 2 3 4 5

Figure 2-7 Acceptable and Incorrect Aiming

0 1 2 3 4 5

Decode Ranges

DS3508-SR/HD/DP

Table 2-3 DS3508-SR/HD/DP Depth of Field

Symbol Density DS3508-SR

Code 39 - 3 mil N/A

Code 39 - 4 mil

Code 39 - 5 mil

Code 39 - 7.5 mil

Code 39 - 20 mil

100% UPC - 13 mil

PDF417 - 6.67 mil

PDF417 - 10 mil

PDF417 - 15 mil

2.60 in. - 4.50 in.

6.60 cm - 11.43 cm

1.00 in. - 6.30 in.

2.54 cm - 16.00 cm

Contact - 10.10 in.

Contact - 25.65 cm

1.00 in. - 20.90 in.

2.54 cm - 53.09 cm

0.90 in. - 15.10 in.

2.29 cm - 38.35 cm

2.70 in. - 6.10 in.

6.86 cm - 15.49 cm

0.40 in. - 9.30 in.

1.02 cm - 23.62 cm

3.30 in. - 14.80 in.

8.38 cm - 37.59 cm

N/A Data Matrix - 4 mil

Data Matrix - 5 mil

Data Matrix - 7.5 mil

Data Matrix - 10 mil

QR Code - 4 mil

N/A

2.10 in. - 5.50 in.

5.33 cm - 13.97 cm

1.10 in. - 7.10 in.

2.79 cm - 18.03 cm

N/A

DS3508-HD/DS3508-DP

1.10 in. - 1.60 in.

2.79 cm - 4.06 cm

Contact - 3.5 in.

Contact - 8.89 cm

Contact - 4.2 in.

Contact - 10.67 cm

Contact - 5.4 in.

Contact - 13.72 cm

1.10 in. - 9.20 in.

2.79 cm - 23.37 cm

0.80 in. - 6.20 in.

2.03 cm - 15.75 cm

Contact - 3.70 in.

Contact - 9.40

Contact - 4.50 in.

Contact - 11.43 cm

3.20 in. - 5.60 in.

8.13 cm - 14.22 cm

1.00 in. - 2.10 in.

2.54 cm - 5.33 cm

0.40 in. - 2.70 in.

1.02 cm - 6.86 cm

Contact - 3.50 in.

Contact - 8.89 cm

Contact - 4.40 in.

Contact - 11.18 cm

1.10 in. - 1.40 in.

2.79 cm - 3.56 cm

Scanning 2 - 9

2 - 10 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Table 2-3 DS3508-SR/HD/DP Depth of Field (Continued)

Symbol Density DS3508-SR

QR Code - 5 mil N/A

QR Code - 7.5 mil

QR Code - 10 mil

N/A

1.50 in. - 6.10 in.

3.81 cm - 15.49 cm

DS3508-HD/DS3508-DP

0.50 in. - 2.20 in.

1.27 cm - 5.59 cm

Contact - 3.30 in.

Contact - 8.38 cm

Contact - 4.00 in.

Contact - 10.16 cm

DS3508-ER

Table 2-4 DS3508-ER Depth of Field

Symbol Density

Code 39 - 7.5 mil

Depth of Field

8.50 in. - 34.00 in.

21.59 cm - 86.36 cm

Code 39 - 10 mil

Code 128 - 15 mil

8.00 in. - 41.50 in.

20.32 cm - 105.41 cm

7.00 in. - 47.50 in.

17.78 cm - 120.65 cm

Code 39 - 20 mil

Code 39 - 55 mil

Code 39 - 100 mil

Code 39 - 100 mil reflective

* - 88.00 in.

* - 223.52 cm

* - 205.00 in.

* - 520.70 cm

* - 335.00 in.

* - 850.90 cm

* - 340.00 in.

* - 863.60 cm

Data Matrix - 10 mil

Data Matrix - 55 mil

8.25 in. - 16.50 in.

20.96 cm - 41.91 cm

* - 89.50 in.

* - 227.33 cm

Data Matrix - 100 mil

Data Matrix - 314 mil

* - 168.50 in.

* - 427.99 cm

* - 450.00 in.

* - 1143.00 cm

* Dependent on length of bar codes.

Chapter 3 Maintenance & Technical

Specifications

Introduction

This chapter provides suggested digital scanner maintenance, troubleshooting, technical specifications, and signal descriptions (pinouts).

Maintenance

Cleaning the scan window is the only maintenance required. A dirty window can affect scanning accuracy.

• Do not allow abrasive material to touch the window.

• Remove any dirt particles with a damp cloth.

• Wipe the window using a tissue moistened with ammonia/water.

• Do not spray water or other cleaning liquids directly into the window.

3 - 2 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Troubleshooting

Table 3-1 Troubleshooting

The aiming pattern does not appear when pressing the trigger.

Problem Possible Causes

No power to the digital scanner.

Possible Solutions

If the configuration requires a power supply, re-connect the power supply.

Incorrect host interface cable is used. Connect the correct host interface cable.

Interface/power cables are loose.

Digital scanner is disabled.

Re-connect cables.

For IBM 468x and USB IBM hand-held,

IBM table top, and OPOS modes, enable the digital scanner via the host interface. Otherwise, see the technical person in charge of scanning.

If using RS-232 Nixdorf B mode, CTS is not asserted.

Aiming pattern is disabled.

Assert CTS line.

Enable the aiming pattern. See

Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern on page 4-30

.

Digital scanner emits short low/short medium/short high beep sequence (power-up beep sequence) more than once.

Digital scanner emits aiming pattern, but does not decode the bar code.

The USB bus may put the digital scanner in a state where power to the scanner is cycled on and off more than once.

Digital scanner is not programmed for the correct bar code type.

Normal during host reset.

Program the digital scanner to read that type of bar code. See

Symbologies

.

Chapter 10,

Bar code symbol is unreadable.

Scan test symbols of the same bar code type to determine if the bar code is defaced.

Move the symbol completely within the aiming pattern.

Wait several seconds and scan again.

Digital scanner emits 4 short high beeps during decode attempt.

The symbol is not completely inside aiming pattern.

Digital scanner has not completed

USB initialization.

Maintenance & Technical Specifications 3 - 3

Table 3-1 Troubleshooting (Continued)

Problem

Digital scanner decodes bar code, but does not transmit the data to the host.

Possible Causes

Digital scanner is not programmed for the correct host type.

Interface cable is loose.

If the digital scanner emits 4 long low beeps, a transmission error occurred.

Possible Solutions

Scan the appropriate host type programming bar code. See the chapter corresponding to the host type.

Re-connect the cable.

Set the scanner's communication parameters to match the host's setting.

Configure the digital scanner's conversion parameters properly.

Host displays scanned data incorrectly.

If the digital scanner emits 5 low beeps, a conversion or format error occurred.

If the digital scanner emits low/high/low beeps, it detected an invalid ADF rule.

If the digital scanner emits high/low beeps, the scanner is buffering Code

39 data.

Digital scanner is not programmed to work with the host.

Program the correct ADF rules. Refer to the Advanced Data Formatting

Programmer Guide.

Normal scanning a Code 39 bar code and the Code 39 Buffering option is enabled.

Scan the appropriate host type programming bar code.

For RS-232, set the digital scanner's communication parameters to match the host's settings.

For a Keyboard Wedge configuration, program the system for the correct keyboard type, and turn off the CAPS

LOCK key.

Program the proper editing options

(e.g., UPC-E to UPC-A Conversion).

Digital scanner emits high/high/high/low beeps when not in use.

Digital scanner emits low/high beeps during programming.

Digital scanner emits low/high/low/high beeps during programming.

RS-232 receive error.

Input error or scanned.

Cancel bar code was

Normal during host reset. Otherwise, set the digital scanner's RS-232 parity to match the host setting.

Scan the correct numeric bar codes within range for the parameter programmed.

Out of ADF parameter storage space.

Erase all rules and re-program with shorter rules.

3 - 4 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Table 3-1 Troubleshooting (Continued)

Problem

Digital scanner emits low/high/low beeps.

Digital scanner emits a power-up beep after changing

USB host type.

Digital scanner emits one high beep when not in use.

Possible Causes

Clearing Code 39 buffer.

The USB bus re-established power to the digital scanner.

In RS-232 mode, a <BEL> character was received and Beep on <BEL> option is enabled.

Possible Solutions

Normal when scanning the Code 39

Buffering Clear Buffer bar code or upon attempt to transmit an empty

Code 39 buffer.

Normal when changing USB host type.

Normal when Beep on <BEL> is enabled and the digital scanner is in

RS-232 mode.

NOTE If after performing these checks the digital scanner still experiences problems, contact the distributor or

call Zebra Support. See page xviii

for the telephone numbers.

Maintenance & Technical Specifications 3 - 5

Technical Specifications

Table 3-2 Technical Specifications

Item

Physical Characteristics

Dimensions

Weight (without cable)

Voltage and Current

Description

7.34 in. H x 4.82 in. W x 2.93 in. D

(18.65 cm H x 12.25 cm W x 7.43 cm D)

12.8 oz. (363 gm)

DS3508-SR/HD/DP: 5 volts ±10%, 330mA

DS3508-ER: 5 volts ±10%, 1.2A

Performance Characteristics

Light Source Aiming pattern: 650nm visible laser diode

Illumination: 630nm LED

Imager Field of View

Roll/Pitch/Yaw

Standard Range Focus: 39.6 H x 25.7 V

High Density Focus: 38.4 H x 24.9 V

DS3508-SR/HD/DP: ±360, ±65, ±60

DS3508-ER: ±360, ±60, ±65

Motion Tolerance

Symbology Decode Capability

1D UPC/EAN (UPCA/UPCE/UPCE1/EAN-8/EAN-13/ JAN-8/JAN-13 plus supplementals, ISBN (Bookland), ISSN, Coupon Code), Code 39 (Standard, Full

ASCII, Trioptic), Code 128 (Standard, Full ASCII, UCC/EAN-128, ISBT-128

Concatenated), Code 93, Codabar/NW7,Code 11 (Standard, Matrix 2 of 5), MSI

Plessey, I 2 of 5 (Interleaved 2 of 5 / ITF, Discrete 2 of 5, IATA, Chinese 2 of 5),

GS1 DataBar (Omnidirectional, Truncated, Stacked, Stacked Omnidirectional,

Limited, Expanded, Expanded Stacked, Inverse), Base 32 (Italian Pharmacode)

PDF417 (and variants)

DS3508-SR/HD/DP: up to 100 in/sec (2.54 m/sec) in presentation mode

(horizontal read rate)

DS3508-ER: up to 60 in/sec (1.52 m/sec) for 100% 13 mil UPC; motion tolerance varies depending on code type, scan distance and print quality

2D

PDF417 (Standard, Macro), MicroPDF417 (Standard, Macro), Composite Codes

(CC-A, CC-B, CC-C)

TLC-39, Aztec (Standard, Inverse), MaxiCode, DataMatrix/ECC 200 (Standard,

Inverse), QR Code (Standard, Inverse, Micro)

Postal

DPM Marks (DPM unit only)

U.S. Postnet and Planet, U.K. Post, Japan Post, Australian Post, Netherlands KIX

Code, Royal Mail 4 State Customer, UPU FICS 4 State Postal, USPS 4CB

Datamatrix marks applied by dot-peening. All supported barcode types listed above marked by laser etching, chemical etching, ink marking, molding, stamping or casting methods on surfaces such as including metal, plastic, rubber or glass

3 - 6 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Table 3-2 Technical Specifications (Continued)

Item

IUID Support

Description

Supports IUID parsing. The ability to read and separate IUID fields per application requirements

See

Decode Ranges on page 2-9

.

Nominal Working Range

(Handheld)

Interfaces Supported

USB, RS-232, RS-485 (IBM 46xx Protocols), Keyboard Wedge, 123Scan

2

User Environment

Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature

Humidity

Drop Specifications

Ambient Light Immunity

Electrostatic Discharge

-4° to 122° F (-20° to 50° C)

-40° to 158° F (-40° to 70° C)

5% to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing

Unit functions normally after repeated 6.5 ft. (2 m) drops to concrete

Incandescent:

Sunlight:

Fluorescent:

Mercury Vapor:

150 ft. candles (1,600 LUX)

8,000 ft. candles (86,000 LUX)

150 ft. candles (1,600 LUX)

150 ft. candles (1,600 LUX)

Sodium Vapor: 150 ft. candles (1,600 LUX)

Immune to direct exposure to normal office and factory lighting conditions, as well as direct exposure to sunlight

DS3508-SR/HD/DP: Conforms to 20 kV air discharge and 8 kV contact discharge

DS3508-ER: Conforms to ±15 kV air discharge and ±8 kV contact discharge

Maintenance & Technical Specifications 3 - 7

Digital Scanner Signal Descriptions

Bottom of scanner

Cable interface port

PIN 10

Interface cable modular connector

PIN 1

Figure 3-1 Digital Scanner Cable Pinouts

3 - 8 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

The signal descriptions in Table 3-3

apply to the connector on the digital scanner and are for reference only.

Table 3-3 Digital Scanner Signal Pin-outs

Pin IBM RS-232

Keyboard

Wedge

USB

Reserved

Power

Ground

IBM_A(+)

Reserved

Power

Ground

TxD

Reserved

Power

Ground

KeyClock

Jump to Pin 6

Power

Ground

Reserved

Reserved

IBM_B(-)

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

RxD

RTS

CTS

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

TermData

KeyData

TermClock

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

D +

Jump to Pin 1

D -

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Chapter 4 User Preferences & Miscellaneous

Digital Scanner Options

Introduction

You can program the digital scanner to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes each user preference feature and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features.

The digital scanner ships with the settings shown in

Table 4-1 on page 4-2 (also see

Appendix A, Standard Default

Parameters

for all host device and miscellaneous defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.

To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the digital scanner is powered down.

NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen (when using the imaging engine). When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars and/or spaces are not merging.

If not using a USB cable, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host.

To return all features to default values, scan the Set Default Parameter on page 4-5

. Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks indicate (

*

)default values.

*

Indicates Default

*

High Volume

(0)

Feature/Option

Option Value

4 - 2 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Scanning Sequence Examples

In most cases, scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to set the beeper tone to high, scan the High Frequency (beeper tone) bar code listed under

Beeper Tone on page 4-12

. The digital scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.

Other parameters, such as Serial Response Time-Out or Data Transmission Formats , require scanning several bar codes. See these parameter descriptions for this procedure.

Errors While Scanning

Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.

User Preferences/Miscellaneous Options Parameter Defaults

Table 4-1 lists defaults for user preferences parameters. To change the default values, scan the appropriate bar

codes in this guide. These new values replace the standard default values in memory. To recall the default parameter values, scan the

Set Default Parameter on page 4-5 .

NOTE See

Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters

for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 4-1 User Preferences Parameter Defaults

Parameter

Parameter

Number

User Preferences

Set Default Parameter

Parameter Bar Code Scanning

Decode Pager Motor

Decode Pager Motor Duration

Trigger Mode

Beep After Good Decode

Beeper Volume

Beeper Tone

Beeper Duration

Suppress Power-up Beeps

Hands-Free Mode

Presentation Performance Mode

Time Delay to Presentation Idle Mode

138

56

140

145

N/A

236

613

626

628

721

630

650

663

Default

Set Defaults

Enable

Enable

500 msec

Level (Standard)

Enable

High

Medium

Medium

Do Not Suppress

Enable

Standard

1 Minute

Page

Number

4-9

4-11

4-11

4-12

4-5

4-6

4-7

4-7

4-13

4-13

4-14

4-14

4-16

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 3

Table 4-1 User Preferences Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Parameter

Number

Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode

Low Power Mode

662

128

Time Delay to Low Power Mode

Fuzzy 1D Processing

Picklist Mode

PDF Prioritization

146

514

402

719

PDF Prioritization Timeout

DPM Scanning

Continuous Bar Code Read

Decode Session Timeout

Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol 137

Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols 144

Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern

Hands-Free Decode Aiming Pattern

306

590

720

521

649

136

Presentation Mode Field of View

Mobile Phone/Display Mode

Decoding Illumination

Torch Mode

Smart LED Mode

Focus Mode

Multicode Mode

Multicode Expression

Multicode Mode Concatenation

Multicode Concatenation Symbology

Miscellaneous Options

Transmit Code ID Character

Prefix Value

Suffix 1 Value

Suffix 2 Value

748

422

677

661

609

716

298

747

717

722

45

99, 105

98, 104

100, 106

1 Hour

Disable

1 Hour

Enable

Default

Page

Number

4-18

4-20

Disabled Always

Disable

200 ms

Enable

Disable

9.9 Sec

0.5 Sec

0.2 Sec

Enable

Enable for PDF

Full

Disable

Enable

Enable

Enable

Auto-Ranging

Disable

1

Disable

4-44

Concatenate as PDF417

4-45

4-36

4-37

4-38

4-39

4-32

4-33

4-34

4-35

4-29

4-29

4-30

4-31

4-26

4-27

4-28

4-28

4-21

4-23

4-24

4-25

None

7013 <CR><LF>

7013 <CR><LF>

4-48

4-49

4-49

4 - 4 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Table 4-1 User Preferences Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Parameter

Number

Scan Data Transmission Format

FN1 Substitution Values

235

103, 109

Transmit “No Read” Message

UID Parsing

94

740

Default

Data as is

Set

Disable

Disable

Page

Number

4-50

4-51

4-52

4-53

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 5

User Preferences

Set Default Parameter

You can reset the digital scanner to two types of defaults: factory defaults or custom defaults. Scan the appropriate bar code below to reset the decoder to its default settings and/or set its current settings as custom defaults.

• Set Defaults - Scan this bar code to reset all default parameters as follows.

• If you previously set custom defaults by scanning Write to Custom Defaults , scan Set Defaults to retrieve and restore the decoder’s custom default settings.

• If you did not set custom defaults, scan Restore Defaults to restore the factory default values listed in

Table A-1

.

• Set Factory Defaults

- Scan this bar code to restore the factory default values listed in Table A-1.

This deletes any custom defaults set.

• Write to Custom Defaults - Scan this bar code to set the current decoder settings as custom defaults. Once set, you can recover custom default settings by scanning Restore Defaults .

*Set Defaults

Set Factory Defaults

Write to Custom Defaults

4 - 6 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Parameter Bar Code Scanning

Parameter # 236

To disable the decoding of parameter bar codes, including the Set Defaults parameter bar codes, scan the

Disable Parameter Scanning bar code below. To enable decoding of parameter bar codes, scan Enable

Parameter Scanning .

*

Enable Parameter Bar Code Scanning

(1)

Disable Parameter Bar Code Scanning

(0)

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 7

Decode Pager Motor

Parameter # 613

The scanner includes a pager motor which, when enabled, vibrates the scanner for a period of time when a successful decode occurs.

NOTE When the pager motor is enabled and the scanner is in IntelliStand, the pager motor disables until the scanner is removed from IntelliStand.

Scan a bar code below to enable or disable the pager motor. If enabled, scan the appropriate bar code to set the period of time in which to vibrate the scanner (see

Decode Pager Motor Duration

below).

Pager Motor Disable

(0)

*Pager Motor Enable

(1)

Decode Pager Motor Duration

Parameter # 626

150 msec

200 msec

4 - 8 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Decode Pager Motor Duration (continued)

250 msec

400 msec

600 msec

300 msec

*500 msec

750 msec

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 9

Trigger Mode

Parameter # 138

Select one of the following trigger modes for the digital scanner:

• Level (Standard) - Upon trigger pull, an aiming dot appears for a programmable duration of time. After this time, the aiming dot changes to a standard laser scanning beam for a full decode session. The laser

scanning beam stays on until the Decode Session Timeout on page 4-28

occurs, a decode occurs, or the trigger is released. If the trigger is released before the timeout expires, the laser shuts off and no decode occurs.

• Two Stage Option 1 (DS3508-ER only) - Upon trigger pull, an aiming dot appears. When the trigger is released, the aiming dot changes to a standard laser scanning beam for a full decode session. The laser scanning beam stays on for one-third of the currently configured decode timeout. If the trigger is pulled again while in a decode session, the scanner beam returns to an aiming dot.

• Two Stage Option 2 (DS3508-ER only) - Upon trigger pull, an aiming dot appears. When the trigger is released, the aiming dot turns off. Pulling the trigger twice quickly turns on the standard laser scanning beam for a full

decode session. The laser scanning beam stays on until the Decode Session Timeout occurs, a decode

occurs, or the trigger is released.

• Presentation (Blink) (DS3508-SR/HD/DP only) - The digital scanner activates decode processing when it detects a bar code in its field of view. After a period of non-use, the digital scanner enters a low power mode in which the LEDs turn off until the digital scanner senses motion.

• Auto Aim (DS3508-SR/HD/DP only) - The digital scanner’s aiming pattern is consistently on when in auto aim mode. A trigger pull activates decode processing. After 2 seconds of inactivity the aiming pattern shuts off.

4 - 10 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Trigger Mode (continued)

*

Level (Standard)

(0)

Two Stage Option 1 (DS3508-ER only)

(14)

Two Stage Option 2 (DS3508-ER only)

(15)

Presentation (Blink) (DS3508-SR/HD/DP only)

(7)

Auto Aim (DS3508-SR/HD/DP only)

(9)

NOTE Hands-free (presentation) scanning does not apply to the DS3508-ER configuration.

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 11

Beep After Good Decode

Parameter # 56

Scan a bar code below to select whether or not the digital scanner beeps after a good decode. If selecting Do Not

Beep After Good Decode , the beeper still operates during parameter menu scanning and to indicate error conditions.

*

Beep After Good Decode

(Enable)

(1)

Do Not Beep After Good Decode

(Disable)

(0)

Beeper Volume

Parameter # 140

To select a beeper volume, scan the Low Volume, Medium Volume , or High Volume bar code.

Low Volume

(2)

Medium Volume

(1)

*

High Volume

(0)

4 - 12 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Beeper Tone

Parameter # 145

To select a decode beep frequency (tone), scan one of the following bar codes.

Off

(3)

Low Tone

(2)

*

Medium Tone

(1)

High Tone

(0)

Medium to High Tone (2-tone)

(4)

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 13

Beeper Duration

Parameter # 628

To select the duration for the beeper, scan one of the following bar codes.

Short

(0)

*

Medium

(1)

Long

(2)

Suppress Power-up Beeps

Parameter # 721

Select whether or not to suppress the digital scanner’s power-up beeps.

*

Do Not Suppress Power-up Beeps

(0)

Suppress Power-up Beeps

(1)

4 - 14 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Hands-Free Mode

Parameter # 630

In hands-free mode, when you place the digital scanner in the scan stand, it automatically triggers when presented

with a bar code. Lifting the digital scanner causes it to behave according to the setting of the Trigger Mode on page

4-9 .

If you select Disable Hands-Free Mode

, the digital scanner behaves according to the setting of the Trigger Mode

regardless of whether it is hand-held or in the scan stand.

*

Enable Hands-Free Mode

(1)

Disable Hands-Free Mode

(0)

NOTE Hands-free (presentation) scanning does not apply to the DS3508-ER configuration.

Presentation Performance Mode

Parameter # 650

Select Standard Presentation Mode when presenting objects to the scanner. Select Enhanced Presentation

Mode when swiping items underneath the scanner.

*

Standard Presentation Mode

(2)

Enhanced Presentation Mode

(0)

NOTE Hands-free (presentation) scanning does not apply to the DS3508-ER configuration.

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 15

Digital Scanner Activity Modes

The digital scanner is capable of four modes of activity:

• Active Mode - The digital scanner uses full illumination for active scanning.

• Idle Mode - In presentation mode only, the digital scanner’s illumination dims after a programmable time

period. See Time Delay to Presentation Idle Mode on page 4-16 . The digital scanner wakes when it is lifted or

senses motion, upon presentation of a bar code, or upon a trigger pull.

• Sleep Mode - In presentation mode only, the digital scanner’s illumination shuts off after a programmable time period after Idle Mode has expired. See

Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode on page 4-18

. The digital scanner wakes when it is lifted or senses motion, upon presentation of a bar code (depending on ambient light conditions), or upon a trigger pull.

• Low Power Mode - The digital scanner enters a low power consumption mode after Sleep Mode has expired, in which the LEDs turn off in order to conserve energy and prolong the life of the scanner. See

Low

Power Mode

. In hand-held mode, this occurs immediately after the programmed

Time Delay to Low Power

Mode

. In presentation mode, this occurs after idle mode and sleep mode. The digital scanner wakes when it is lifted, senses a trigger pull, or when the host attempts to communicate.

NOTE The digital scanner does not use Low Power Mode when connected to a USB or IBM host.

NOTE Hands-free (presentation) scanning does not apply to the DS3508-ER configuration.

Active Mode

Time Delay to

Presentation

Idle Mode value

Idle Mode

Time Delay to

Presentation

Sleep Mode value

Sleep Mode

Time Delay to

Low Power

Mode value

Low Power Mode

Note: Time delays are cumulative.

Figure 4-1 Power Levels

4 - 16 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Time Delay to Presentation Idle Mode

Parameter # 663

In presentation mode, this parameter sets the time the digital scanner remains active before entering idle mode with dim illumination. The digital scanner wakes upon presentation of a bar code or a trigger pull.

Disable

(0)

1 Second

(1)

10 Seconds

(10)

*1 Minute

(17)

5 Minutes

(21)

15 Minutes

(27)

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 17

Time Delay to Presentation Idle Mode (continued)

30 Minutes

(29)

45 Minutes

(30)

1 Hour

(33)

3 Hours

(35)

6 Hours

(38)

9 Hours

(41)

NOTE Hands-free (presentation) scanning does not apply to the DS3508-ER configuration.

4 - 18 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode

Parameter # 662

In presentation mode, this parameter sets the time the digital scanner remains active before entering sleep mode with no illumination. The digital scanner wakes when it senses motion, upon presentation of a bar code, or a trigger pull.

NOTE Digital scanner performance is not guaranteed in dim conditions.

Disable

(0)

1 Second

(1)

10 Seconds

(10)

1 Minute

(17)

5 Minutes

(21)

NOTE Hands-free (presentation) scanning does not apply to the DS3508-ER configuration.

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 19

Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode (continued)

15 Minutes

(27)

30 Minutes

(29)

45 Minutes

(30)

*1 Hour

(33)

3 Hours

(35)

6 Hours

(38)

9 Hours

(41)

4 - 20 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Low Power Mode

Parameter # 128

If enabled, the digital scanner enters a low power consumption mode after Sleep Mode has expired, in which the

LEDs turn off in order to conserve energy and prolong the life of the scanner. In hand-held mode, this occurs

immediately after the programmed Time Delay to Low Power Mode . In presentation mode, this occurs after idle

mode and sleep mode. The digital scanner wakes when it is lifted, senses a trigger pull, or when the host attempts to communicate.

If disabled, power remains on after each decode attempt.

*

Disable Low Power Mode

(0)

Enable Low Power Mode

(1)

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 21

Time Delay to Low Power Mode

Parameter # 146

NOTE This parameter only applies when Low Power Mode is enabled.

This parameter sets the time the digital scanner remains active before entering lower power mode (after the applicable activity mode - see

Digital Scanner Activity Modes on page 4-15

). The digital scanner wakes upon trigger pull or when the host attempts to communicate with the digital scanner.

1 Second

(17)

10 Seconds

(26)

1 Minute

(33)

5 Minutes

(37)

15 Minutes

(43)

4 - 22 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Time Delay to Low Power Mode (continued)

30 Minutes

(45)

*

1 Hour

(49)

45 Minutes

(46)

3 Hours

(51)

6 Hours

(54)

9 Hours

(57)

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 23

Fuzzy 1D Processing

Parameter # 514

This option is enabled by default to optimize decode performance on 1D bar codes, including damaged and poor quality symbols. Disable this only if you experience time delays when decoding 2D bar codes, or in detecting a no decode.

*

Enable Fuzzy 1D Processing

(1)

Disable Fuzzy 1D Processing

(0)

4 - 24 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Picklist Mode

Parameter # 402

Picklist mode enables the digital scanner to decode only bar codes that are aligned under the laser crosshair.

Select one of the following picklist modes for the digital scanner:

• Disabled Always - Picklist mode is always disabled.

• Enabled in Hand-Held Mode - Picklist mode is enabled when the digital scanner is out of hands-free mode and disabled when the digital scanner is in presentation mode.

• Enabled in Hands-Free Mode - Picklist mode is enabled when the digital scanner is in hands-free mode only.

• Enabled Always - Picklist mode is always enabled.

NOTE

If you enabled DPM Scanning on page 4-27 , disable Picklist Mode when scanning a DPM bar code.

Picklist performance is not guaranteed for DPM bar codes.

*

Disabled Always

(0)

Enabled in Hand-Held Mode

(1)

Enabled in Hands-Free Mode

(3)

Enabled Always

(2)

NOTE Picklist Mode temporarily overrides the Disable Decode Aiming Pattern option. The Decode Aiming

Pattern cannot be disabled when the following options are selected:

• Smart LED Mode is set to Enable (DS3508-ER configuration)

• Focus Mode is set to Auto-Ranging (DS3508-ER configuration)

• Picklist Mode is set to Enable (DS3508-ER and DS3508-SR configurations)

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 25

PDF Prioritization

Parameter # 719

Enable this feature to delay decoding a 1D bar code (Code 128) by the value specified in PDF Prioritization

Timeout

. During that time the digital scanner attempts to decode a PDF417 symbol (e.g., on a US driver's license), and if successful, reports this only. If it does not decode (can not find) a PDF417 symbol, it reports the 1D symbol after the timeout. The 1D symbol must be in the device’s field of view for the digital scanner to report it. This parameter does not affect decoding other symbologies.

NOTE The 1D Code 128 bar code lengths include the following:

- 7 to 10 characters

- 14 to 17 characters

- 27 to 28 characters

In addition, a Code 39 bar code with the following lengths are considered to potentially be part of a US driver’s license:

- 8 characters

- 12 characters.

*

Disable PDF Prioritization

(0)

Enable PDF Prioritization

(1)

4 - 26 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

PDF Prioritization Timeout

Parameter # 720

When PDF Prioritization is enabled, this timeout specifies how long the digital scanner attempts to decode a

PDF417 symbol before reporting the 1D bar code in the field of view. Scan the following bar code, then scan four digits from

Numeric Bar Codes on page D-1

that specify the timeout in milliseconds. For example, to enter 400 ms, scan the following bar code, then scan 0400. The range is 0 to 5000 ms, and the default is 200 ms.

PDF Prioritization Timeout

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 27

DPM Scanning

Parameter # 521

Unlike bar codes that are typically printed on labels, a direct part mark (DPM) is a symbol that is marked directly on an item’s surface for permanent identification. These symbols are marked using methods such as laser etching

and dot peening (see Figure 2-6 on page 2-7 for an example of a dot peen symbol). The DS3508-DP (DPM) reader

scans these types of symbols.

NOTE When the DS3508-DP digital scanner is DPM enabled, the digital scanner reads all symbols including

DPM, 1D, PDF417, etc. If you do not require DPM reading, scan Disable DPM Scanning to ensure optimum scanner performance.

If you enable DPM Scanning

, disable Picklist Mode on page 4-24

when scanning a DPM bar code.

Picklist performance is not guaranteed for DPM bar codes.

Also, if you enable DPM Scanning, the scanner behaves as if the Data Matrix Inverse Autodetect setting is selected. When you disable DPM Scanning, the previous (user-selected) Data Matrix Inverse setting

remains in effect. See Data Matrix Inverse on page 10-77 .

To configure the DS3508-DP digital scanner for DPM reading:

1.

If you disabled DPM scanning in the DS3508-DP digital scanner, scan Enable DPM Scanning below.

2.

Before scanning a DPM bar code, ensure you enabled

Data Matrix Inverse on page 10-77 .

*Enable DPM Scanning

(1)

Disable DPM Scanning

(0)

4 - 28 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Continuous Bar Code Read

Parameter # 649

Enable this to report every bar code while the trigger is pressed.

NOTE

Zebra strongly recommends enabling Picklist Mode on page 4-24

with this feature. Disabling Picklist

Mode can cause accidental decodes when more than one bar code is in the imaging engine's field of view.

*

Disable Continuous Bar Code Read

(0)

Enable Continuous Bar Code Read

(1)

Decode Session Timeout

Parameter # 136

This parameter sets the maximum time decode processing continues during a scan attempt. It is programmable in

0.1 second increments from 0.5 to 9.9 seconds. The default timeout is 9.9 seconds.

To set a Decode Session Timeout, scan the bar code below. Next, scan two numeric bar codes from

Appendix D,

Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired on time. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. For

example, to set a Decode Session Timeout of 0.5 seconds, scan the bar code below, then scan the 0 and 5 bar codes. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel

on page D-2 .

Decode Session Timeout

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 29

Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol

Parameter # 137

Use this option in presentation mode and Continuous Bar Code Read to prevent the beeper from continuously beeping when a symbol is left in the digital scanner’s field of view. It is programmable in 0.1 second increments from 0.0 to 9.9 seconds. The default interval is 0.5 seconds.

To select the timeout between decodes for the same symbol, scan the bar code below, then scan two numeric bar

codes from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired interval, in 0.1 second increments.

Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol

Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols

Parameter # 144

Use this option in presentation mode and Continuous Bar Code Read to control the time the scanner is inactive between decoding different symbols. It is programmable in 0.1 second increments from 0.1 to 9.9 seconds. The default is 0.2 seconds.

To select the timeout between decodes for different symbols, scan the bar code below, then scan two numeric bar

codes from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired interval, in 0.1 second increments.

Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols

4 - 30 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern

Parameter # 306

Select Enable Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern to project the aiming pattern during bar code capture, Disable

Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern to turn the aiming pattern off, or Enable Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF to project the aiming pattern when the digital scanner detects a 2D bar code.

This parameter does not apply to Snapshot Mode. See Operational Modes on page 5-4

.

NOTE With

Picklist Mode on page 4-24

enabled, the decode aiming pattern flashes even when the Decode

Aiming Pattern is disabled.

*

Enable Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern

(2)

Disable Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern

(0)

Enable Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF

(3)

NOTE Picklist Mode temporarily over-rides the Disable Decode Aiming Pattern option. The Decode Aiming

Pattern cannot be disabled when the following options are selected:

• Smart LED Mode is set to Enable (DS3508-ER configuration)

• Focus Mode is set to Auto-Ranging (DS3508-ER configuration)

• Picklist Mode is set to Enable (DS3508-ER and DS3508-SR configurations)

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 31

Hands-Free Decode Aiming Pattern

Parameter # 590

Select Enable Hands-Free Decode Aiming Pattern to project the aiming pattern during bar code capture,

Disable Hands-Free Decode Aiming Pattern to turn the aiming pattern off, or Enable Hands-Free Decode

Aiming Pattern on PDF to project the aiming pattern when the digital scanner detects a 2D bar code.

This parameter does not apply to Snapshot Mode. See Operational Modes on page 5-4

.

NOTE With

Picklist Mode on page 4-24

enabled, the decode aiming pattern flashes even when the Decode

Aiming Pattern is disabled.

Enable Hands-Free Decode Aiming Pattern

(1)

Disable Hands-Free Decode Aiming Pattern

(0)

*Enable Hands-Free Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF

(2)

NOTE Picklist Mode temporarily overrides the Disable Decode Aiming Pattern parameter. The Decode Aiming

Pattern cannot be disabled (using the DS3508-SR and DS3508-ER configurations) when the following parameters/settings are selected:

• Smart LED Mode is set to Enable (DS3508-ER configuration)

• Focus Mode is set to Auto-Ranging (DS3508-ER configuration)

• Picklist Mode is set to Enable (DS3508-ER and DS3508-SR configurations)

4 - 32 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Presentation Mode Field of View

Parameter # 609

In presentation mode, by default the digital scanner searches the larger area of the aiming pattern ( Full Field of

View ).

To search for a bar code in a smaller region around the aiming pattern’s center cross in order to speed search time, select Small Field of View or Medium Field of View .

Small Field of View

(0)

Medium Field of View

(1)

*Full Field of View

(2)

NOTE Hands-free (presentation) scanning does not apply to the DS3508-ER configuration.

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 33

Mobile Phone/Display Mode

Parameter # 716

This mode improves bar code reading performance off mobile phones and electronic displays. Enable this in hand-held, hands-free, or both modes, or disable mode.

NOTE If you enable this mode, for best performance also select

Presentation Performance Mode on page 4-14

and enable

Hands-Free Decode Aiming Pattern on page 4-31 .

*

Disable Mobile Phone/Display Mode

(0)

Enable in Hand-Held Mode

(1)

Enable in Hands-Free Mode

(2)

Enable in Both Modes

(3)

NOTE Torch Mode does not function when Mobile Phone/Display Mode is enabled.

4 - 34 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Decoding Illumination (Hand-Held Mode only)

Parameter # 298

When in hand-held mode, selecting Enable Decoding Illumination causes the digital scanner to flash illumination to aid decoding. Select Disable Decoding Illumination to prevent the digital scanner from using decoding illumination.

Enabling illumination usually results in superior images. The effectiveness of the illumination decreases as the distance to the target increases.

*

Enable Decoding Illumination

(1)

Disable Decoding Illumination

(0)

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 35

Torch Mode (DS3508-ER Only)

Parameter # 747

When using the DS3508-ER, selecting Enable Torch Mode causes the digital scanner to provide illumination longer to optimize decode accuracy when scanning at an extended decode range (far distance of 5 feet or greater).

Select Disable Torch Mode to prevent the digital scanner from using Torch Mode.

Disable Torch Mode

(1)

*Enable Torch Mode

(0)

NOTE Torch Mode does not function when Mobile Phone/Display Mode is enabled.

4 - 36 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Smart LED Mode (DS3508-ER Only)

Parameter # 748

Selecting Enable Smart LED Mode optimizes decode accuracy when scanning near using the DS3508-ER digital scanner.

Select Disable Smart LED Mode to prevent the digital scanner from using Smart LED Mode.

Disable Smart LED Mode

(1)

*Enable Smart LED Mode

(0)

NOTE When using Smart LED Mode , it is normal for the illumination to appear off center.

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 37

Focus Mode

Parameter # 422

Select the Focus Mode to control the working range of the DS3508-ER digital scanner.

• Select Far focus to optimize the digital scanner to read at its far position. Use this mode when scanning large bar codes in order to fit these bar codes in the digital scanner’s field of view.

• Select Near focus to optimize the digital scanner to read at its near position. Use this mode when scanning small, high-density bar codes.

• Select Alternating focus to toggle between near and far focus position.

• Select Auto-Ranging focus to allow the digital scanner to control the focus operation.

Far

(0)

Alternating

(2)

Near

(1)

*Auto-Ranging

(3)

NOTE When in Far Focus Mode, you may not be able to decode standard size parameter bar codes.

4 - 38 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Multicode Mode (DS3508-SR / DS3508-HD)

Parameter # 677

Enable this parameter to allow multiple bar codes to decode upon one trigger event based on the programmed multicode expression. The digital scanner reports a successful decode and provides user indication only if it decodes all bar codes indicated by the multicode expression, otherwise the decode fails. Bar codes are transmitted in the order defined in the multicode expression. Disable this to operate in normal decode mode.

NOTES The DS3508-DP and DS3508-ER configurations do not support Multicode Mode.

Enabling Multicode Mode disables

Picklist Mode

.

Multicode does not operate in presentation mode.

Do not use Multicode Mode if a trigger is set to Laser Preferred Decoding .

Do not use Multicode Mode if

Continuous Bar Code Read is enabled.

When using this mode, always orient the digital scanner at the same distance and angle (perpendicular).

*

Disable Multicode Mode

(0)

Enable Multicode Mode

(1)

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 39

Multicode Expression (DS3508-SR / DS3508-HD)

Parameter # 661

Use this feature to program a multicode expression for

Multicode Mode (DS3508-SR / DS3508-HD)

(grid method).

The default is 1, which indicates any bar code.

NOTE The DS3508-DP and DS3508-ER configurations do not support this feature.

To set the multicode expression:

1.

2.

3.

Scan the bar code below.

Scan bar codes from the alphanumeric keyboard in the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide to define the expression.

Scan the End of Message bar code from the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide.

Multicode Expression

Multicode Expression Syntax

Multicode Expression Syntax: [n] [Element 1]; [Element 2 ]; ... [Element n];

Where n is the number of elements in the overall expression.

The multicode expression describes the bar code(s) that the digital scanner can expect to find in an image. Each element represents one bar code in the digital scanner's field of view. The order of elements in the expression is the order in which bar code data from each element transmits to the host. Elements are defined using one or more of the following methods:

By Region . This type of element limits decoding to a specific area within the digital scanner's field of view. Region coordinates are defined as the top left and bottom right corners of the region, expressed in percentages of the field of view. These can range from 0% to 100%, or 0x00 to 0x64 in hex, for both horizontal and vertical axes. A region element is constructed as:

[R] [4] [Top, Left] [Bottom, Right]

Where:

• [R] is the character R

• [4] is 0x04, indicating there are four bytes thereafter to describe the region

• [Top, Left] are two values representing the top left corner of the region

• [Bottom, Right] are two values representing the bottom right corner of the region

4 - 40 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

By Code Type . An element can specify a specific bar code symbology to find and decode somewhere in the field of view. A code type element is constructed as:

[C] [2] [Code Type]

Where:

• [C] is the character C

• [2] is 0x02, indicating there are two bytes thereafter to describe the code type

• [Code Type] is the desired symbology's parameter number (see

Chapter 10, Symbologies

). For single-byte parameter numbers, extend the value to two bytes by adding 00 before the parameter number.

Notes

When defining multicode expressions consider the following:

• Use the Code Type specifier if there are bar codes of more than one code type in view.

• Always use the Region specifier when there are multiple bar codes of the same code type.

• When transmission order is important (the first element in the expression transmits first), use either type to define the order.

• When there are unwanted bar codes in view, filter them out in one of two ways:

• Use Code Type to specify only the target bar codes.

• Use Region to identify only the target bar codes.

• If the expression does not contain a Region specifier, scanning angle and distance do not matter. If you specify a region you must scan in a fixed orientation and at a fixed distance. Because of this, it is preferable to use the Code Type specifier rather than the Region specifier.

• When defining regions:

• Defining a region much larger than the bar code improves tolerance to scan distance and angle, but can cause a decode of a nearby bar code instead of the target bar code. Therefore, for best performance define larger regions when only a few bar codes are in view and those in view are widely separated.

• Defining a region close to (or smaller than) the target bar code improves the probability of decoding this bar code rather than one nearby, but scan distance and angle must be more accurate. Therefore, for best performance define small regions when many bar codes are in view or those in view are close together.

• Use Region elements to improve decode speeds by reducing the image area to search for the target bar code.

• Specifying Code Type may also improve decode speeds for some code types.

• Although you can scan parameter bar codes when multicode mode is enabled, be aware of the following: If the multicode expression defined a region(s), to scan a parameter bar code you must position the bar code within the first region defined in the expression. In some cases, this first region is not the center of the image and aiming at the parameter bar code does not result in a successful decode.

The following examples show the multicode expressions in both hex and decimal formats, however in the sample figures the values are decimal. Be sure to use the correct base numbering system when creating an expression. A region specified as 0x00 0x00 0x64 0x32 represents a region with coordinates of Top-Left (0,0) and Bottom Right

(100,50).

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 41

Example 1

To decode one Code 128 bar code anywhere in the image (even when bar codes of other types are in view), as in

Figure 4-3

, program the expression as follows:

The expression in decimal is (formatted for readability):

1 C 2 0 8 ;

To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is (spaces are for readability):

[MultiCode-Expression] 01 C 02 00 08 ; [End Of Message]

To program the expression via host command (SSI/SNAPI) the sequence is:

0x01 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 0x3b

0%

0% 50% 100%

PDF417 Code

Code 128 Code

50%

UPC-A Code

0 12345 67890 5

100%

Figure 4-2 Multicode Expression Example 1

4 - 42 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Example 2a

To decode a Code128 (Code Type=8) on the top half of the image and a PDF417 (Code Type=15) on the bottom half of the image, as in

Figure 4-4

, program the expression as follows:

The expression in decimal is (formatted for readability):

2 C 2 0 8 R 4 0 0 100 50 ; C 2 0 15 R 4 0 50 100 100 ;

To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is:

[MultiCode-Expression] 02 C 02 00 08 R 04 00 00 64 32 ; C 02 00 0F R 04 00 32 64 64 ; [End Of Message]

To program the expression via host command (SSI/SNAPI) the sequence is:

0x02 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x00 0x64 0x32 0x3B 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x0F 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x32

0x64 0x64 0x3B

Example 2b

In

Figure 4-4 , if the bottom PDF417 bar code must transmit first, reverse the sequence of the two bar codes:

The expression in decimal is (formatted for readability):

2 C 2 0 15 R 4 0 50 100 100 ; C 2 0 8 R 4 0 0 100 50 ;

To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is:

[MultiCode-Expression] 02 C 02 00 0F R 04 00 32 64 64 ; C 02 00 08 R 04 00 00 64 32 ; [End Of Message]

To program the expression via host command (SSI/SNAPI) the sequence is:

0x02 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x0F 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x32 0x64 0x64 0x3B 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x00

0x64 0x32 0x3B

0% 50% 100%

0%

(0,0)

Code 128 Code

(100,50)

50%

(0,50)

PDF417 Code

100%

Figure 4-3 Multicode Expression Example 2

(160,100)

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 43

Example 3

To decode the set of three bar codes while excluding the center Code 128 bar code, as in

Figure 4-4

, the expression is:

The expression in decimal is (formatted for readability):

3 C 2 0 15 R 4 0 0 50 50 ; C 2 [F0 24] R 4 70 0 100 40 ; C 2 0 8 R 4 65 60 100 100 ;

To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is:

[MultiCode-Expression] 03 C 02 00 0F R 04 00 00 32 32 ; C 02 F0 24 R 04 46 00 64 28 ;

C 02 00 08 R 04 41 3C 64 64 ; [End Of Message]

To program the expression via host command (SSI/SNAPI) the sequence is:

0x03 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x0F 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x00 0x32 0x32 0x3B 0x43 0x02 0xF0 0x24 0x52 0x04 0x46 0x00

0x64 0x28 0x3B 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 0x52 0x04 0x41 0x3C 0x64 0x64 0x3B

0%

0%

(0,0)

40% 50% 70%

(70,0)

100%

40%

50%

PDF417 Code

(40,40)

Data Matrix Code

(100,40)

40%

Code 128 Code

(65,60)

Code 128 Code

60%

(100,100)

65%

100%

Figure 4-4 Multicode Expression Example 3

4 - 44 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Multicode Mode Concatenation (DS3508-SR / DS3508-HD)

Parameter # 717

Enable this parameter to transmit multiple decoded bar codes, as specified by the

Multicode Expression

(DS3508-SR / DS3508-HD)

, as one bar code. Use the Multicode Concatenation Symbology (DS3508-SR /

DS3508-HD) parameter to specify how the concatenated bar codes transmit.

Disable this to transmit decoded bar codes separately.

NOTE When using Multicode Mode Concatenation, disable

Transmit Code ID Character on page 4-48

and check digits.

NOTE The DS3508-DP and DS3508-ER configurations do not support this feature.

Enable Multicode Mode Concatenation

(1)

*

Disable Multicode Mode Concatenation

(0)

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 45

Multicode Concatenation Symbology (DS3508-SR / DS3508-HD)

Parameter # 722

Use this parameter to specify how to transmit the concatenated bar codes decoded as specified by the Multicode

Expression (DS3508-SR / DS3508-HD) .

Multicode Mode Concatenation (DS3508-SR / DS3508-HD)

must be enabled to use this option.

NOTE The DS3508-DP and DS3508-ER configurations do not support this feature.

Concatenation as Code 128

(1)

*

Concatenation as PDF417

(2)

Concatenation as Data Matrix

(3)

Concatenation as Maxicode

(4)

4 - 46 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Multicode Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Multicode Expression Programming

Use the following suggestions if encountering problems programming a multicode expression:

• Ensure the expression is valid. Invalid expressions are rejected during programming. When an expression is rejected the previous expression remains intact. If after programming the expression the digital scanner can still decode any bar code, the expression was possibly rejected.

• When programming the multicode expression via parameter bar code, the digital scanner generates beeps. If any of the following beeps do not sound during programming, an error occurred (see

Table 2-1 on page 2-2

and Table 2-2 on page 2-4

for error indicators):

• Scanning the Multicode Expression bar code produces a two-tone (same pitch) beep.

• Scanning each value of the expression produces a two-tone (same pitch) beep.

• Scanning the End Of Message bar code produces a four-tone (high-low-high-low) beep.

• Check the expression for syntax errors.

Try programming a simple expression to ensure the syntax is correct. See Examples of Simple Multicode

Expressions .

Review Notes on page 4-40 for additional hints.

Troubleshooting Multicode Mode Scanning and Decoding

Use the following suggestions if encountering problems using multicode mode:

• If the digital scanner appears to decode any single bar code instead of the intended multiple bar codes, ensure you enabled

Smart LED Mode (DS3508-ER Only) on page 4-36

. Programming the multicode expression does not enable multicode mode.

• When specifying Region , ensure:

• Coordinates are within range the 0-100 decimal (or 0x00 - 0x64 hexadecimal).

• Top, Left is above Bottom, Right. Top, Left is 0,0 (0x00, 0x00 hexadecimal), and Bottom, Right is 100,100

(0x64, 0x64 hexadecimal).

• Regions for two or more bar codes do not overlap.

• When specifying Code Type ensure the digital scanner supports the code type. Try decoding a single bar code without using multicode. If it does not decode try enabling the bar code type. See

Chapter 10,

Symbologies .

• Experiment with simpler expressions, then add to it until you discover the source of the error. For example try

the simplest expression (see Examples of Simple Multicode Expressions ) and make sure you can scan a

single bar code. If so, extend the expression by adding a second bar code, specifying a region, or specifying the code type. Verify that the digital scanner can decode this new expression. Continue adding to the expression until it fails to decode as expected, indicating the source of the error.

Review Notes on page 4-40 for additional hints.

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 47

Examples of Simple Multicode Expressions

The simplest multicode expression is:

• One bar code of any type, anywhere in the image.

• To program this use: [MultiCode-Expression] 01 ; [End Of Message]

Another simple multicode expression is:

• One Code 128 bar code, anywhere in the image.

• To program this use: [MultiCode-Expression] 01 C 02 00 08 ; [End Of Message]

4 - 48 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters

Transmit Code ID Character

Parameter # 45

A Code ID character identifies the code type of a scanned bar code. This is useful when decoding more than one code type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the Code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol.

Select no Code ID character, a Symbol Code ID character, or an AIM Code ID character. For Code ID Characters,

see Symbol Code Identifiers on page B-1

and

AIM Code Identifiers on page B-3

.

NOTE

If you enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID Character, and enable Transmit “No Read”

Message on page 4-52

, the digital scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR message.

Symbol Code ID Character

(2)

AIM Code ID Character

(1)

*

None

(0)

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 49

Prefix/Suffix Values

Key Category Parameter # P = 99, S1 = 98, S2 = 100

Decimal Value Parameter # P = 105, S1 = 104, S2 = 106

You can append a prefix and/or one or two suffixes to scan data for use in data editing. To set a value for a prefix or

suffix, scan a four-digit number (i.e., four bar codes from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes

) that corresponds to that

value. See Table E-1 on page E-1

for the four-digit codes.

When using host commands to set the prefix or suffix, set the key category parameter to 1, then set the 3-digit decimal value. See

Table E-1 on page E-1

for the four-digit codes.

To correct an error or change a selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2 .

NOTE To use Prefix/Suffix values, first set the

Scan Data Transmission Format on page 4-50

.

Scan Prefix

(7)

Scan Suffix 1

(6)

Scan Suffix 2

(8)

Data Format Cancel

4 - 50 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Scan Data Transmission Format

Parameter # 235

To change the scan data format, scan one of the following eight bar codes corresponding to the desired format.

NOTE If using this parameter do not use ADF rules to set the prefix/suffix .

To set values for the prefix and/or suffix, see Prefix/Suffix Values on page 4-49

.

*

Data As Is

(0)

<DATA> <SUFFIX 1>

(1)

<DATA> <SUFFIX 2>

(2)

<DATA> <SUFFIX 1> <SUFFIX 2>

(3)

<PREFIX> <DATA >

(4)

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 51

Scan Data Transmission Format (continued)

<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 1>

(5)

<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 2>

(6)

<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 1> <SUFFIX 2>

(7)

FN1 Substitution Values

Key Category Parameter # 103

Decimal Value Parameter # 109

The Wedge and USB HID Keyboard hosts support a FN1 Substitution feature. Enabling this substitutes any FN1 character (0x1b) in an EAN128 bar code with a value. This value defaults to 7013 (Enter Key).

When using host commands to set the FN1 substitution value, set the key category parameter to 1, then set the

3-digit keystroke value. See the ASCII Character Set table for the current host interface for the desired value.

To select a FN1 substitution value via bar code menus:

1.

Scan the bar code below.

Set FN1 Substitution Value

2.

Locate the keystroke desired for FN1 Substitution in the ASCII Character Set table for the current host interface. Enter the 4-digit ASCII Value by scanning each digit in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes .

To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel .

To enable FN1 substitution for USB HID keyboard, scan the Enable FN1 Substitution

bar code on page 4-51

.

4 - 52 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Transmit “No Read” Message

Parameter # 94

Scan a bar code below to select whether or not to transmit a No Read message. Enable this to transmit the characters NR when a successful decode does not occur before trigger release or the Decode Session Timeout

expires. See Decode Session Timeout on page 4-28

. Disable this to send nothing to the host if a symbol does not decode.

NOTE If you enable Transmit No Read , and also enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID Character

for Transmit Code ID Character on page 4-48

, the digital scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to the

NR message.

Enable No Read

(1)

*

Disable No Read

(0)

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 53

UID Parsing

Parameter # 740

NOTE UID parsing is only supported by DP configurations of the digital scanner.

NOTE UID constructs are compliant with the US Department of Defense MIL - STD - 130N.

A UID, or Unique Identifier, is used to identify and track data (e.g., manufacturer, distribution, lifetime of products and other information) specified by the United States Department of Defense for all imported packages containing merchandise equal to or greater than $5,000.00. Vendors are required to provide a legible and permanent UID marking, in the form of a data matrix bar code, with the contents.

DP configurations of the digital scanner read the data matrix bar code, verify it is a valid UID bar code and parse the data into a UID bar code ( Criterion: Parsed UID bar code type with UID fields). This output can be used at a later date.

To enable/disable UID parsing, scan the appropriate bar code below. UID parsing is disabled by default. Scan

Enable Embedded UID Parsing to start the parsing process.

*

Disable UID Parsing

Enable Embedded UID Parsing

4 - 54 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

UID Parsing Output

When a UID successfully parses the fields shown in Table 4-2

are created. Each field is separated by a comma. If data is missing from a field in the UID, a lone comma fills the field.

NOTE When a UID successfully parses, a parsed UID bar code type transmits to the host.

When parsing is unsuccessful but data transmits to the host anyway, the data is in the data matrix format.

Table 4-2 Output Fields

Field

1

2

Concatenated UID

Description

Construct type (UID1 or UID2)

5

6

3

4

7

8

Enterprise ID

Serialized part #

Original part #

Lot #

Current part #

Scanned data in ASCII mode

Example Output - Successful Parsed Data

D12345WS51-004041,UID2,12345,041,WS51-004,,,[)> rs 06 gs 17V12345 gs 1PWS51-004 gs S041 rs eot

Table 4-3 Output Fields

Field

1

2

D12345WS51-004041

UID2

5

6

3

4

7

8

12345

041

WS51-004

Description

(no data supplied, comma filled field)

(no data supplied, comma filled field)

[)> rs 06 gs 17V12345 gs 1PWS51-004 gs S041 rs eot

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 55

UID Error Mode Options

• UID Error Beep (default): Scan UID Error Beep to program the digital scanner not to parse the data contained in the UID when the UID is not formatted correctly. An error tone sounds and no data transmits to the host.

• UID Error Pass Data : Scan UID Error Pass Data to program the digital scanner to transmit data to the host even when parsing fails. The digital scanner reads the incorrectly encoded UID, assumes the host can process the data and transmits the unformatted contents of the bar code. No error tone sounds.

• UID Error Beep and Pass Data : Scan UID Error Pass Data to program the digital scanner to transmit data to the host even when parsing fails. The digital scanner reads the incorrectly encoded UID, assumes the host can process the data and transmits the unformatted contents of the bar code. An error tone sounds.

Scan the appropriate bar code below to program potential error conditions.

UID Error Beep

UID Error Pass Data

UID Error Beep and Pass Data

4 - 56 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Sample ADF Rule for UID

To transmit only the concatenated UID field of the parsed UID, scan the bar codes below, in order.

Begin New Rule

Criterion: Parsed UID

Send Data Up to Character

,

(Comma)

Save Rule

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 57

UID Sample Bar Codes

05 Format

WS51-004041,UID2,,041,WS51-004,,,[)> rs 05 gs 01WS51-004 gs 21041 rs eot

Table 4-4 Sample 05 Formatted Data

Field

1 - Concatenated UID

2 - Construct type (UID1 or UID2)

3 - Enterprise ID

4 - Serialized part #

5 - Original part #

6 - Lot #

7 - Current part #

8 - Scanned data in ASCII mode

WS51-004041

UID2

, (no data supplied)

041

Description

WS51-004

, (no data supplied)

, (no data supplied)

[)> rs 05 gs 01WS51-004 gs 21041 rs eot

06 Format

D12345WS51-004041,UID2,12345,041,WS51-004,,,[)> rs 06 gs 17V12345 gs 1PWS51-004 gs S041 rs eot

Table 4-5 Sample 06 Formatted Data

Field

1 - Concatenated UID

2 - Construct type (UID1 or UID2)

3 - Enterprise ID

4 - Serialized part #

5 - Original part #

6 - Lot #

7 - Current part #

8 - Scanned data in ASCII mode

D12345WS51-004041

UID2

12345

041

Description

WS51-004

, (no data supplied)

, (no data supplied)

[)> rs 06 gs 17V12345 gs 1PWS51-004 gs S041 rs eot

4 - 58 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

12 Format

D12345WS51-004041,UID2,12345,041,WS51-004,,,[)> rs 12 gs MFR 12345 gs PNO WS51-004 gs SEQ 041 rs eot

Table 4-6 Sample 12 Formatted Data

Field Description

1 - Concatenated UID

2 - Construct type (UID1 or UID2)

3 - Enterprise ID

4 - Serialized part #

D12345WS51-004041

UID2

12345

041

5 - Original part #

6 - Lot #

7 - Current part #

8 - Scanned data in ASCII mode

WS51-004

, (no data supplied)

, (no data supplied)

[)> rs 12 gs MFR 12345 gs PNO WS51-004 gs SEQ 041 rs eot

DD Format

D12345WS51-004041,UID2,12345,041,WS51-004,,,[)> rs DD gs MFR 12345 gs PNO WS51-004 gs SEQ 041 rs eot

Table 4-7 Sample DD Formatted Data

Field

1 - Concatenated UID D12345WS51-004041

Description

2 - Construct type (UID1 or UID2)

3 - Enterprise ID

4 - Serialized part #

5 - Original part #

6 - Lot #

7 - Current part #

8 - Scanned data in ASCII mode

UID2

12345

041

WS51-004

, (no data supplied)

, (no data supplied)

[)> rs DD gs MFR 12345 gs PNO WS51-004 gs SEQ 041 rs eot

Chapter 5 Imaging Preferences

Introduction

NOTE The DS3508-ER configuration does not support imaging preferences parameters.

You can program the digital scanner to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes imaging preference features and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features.

The digital scanner ships with the settings in Imaging Preferences Parameter Defaults on page 5-2

(also see

Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous defaults). If the default values suit

requirements, programming is not necessary.

To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when you power down the digital scanner.

NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars and/or spaces are not merging.

If not using a USB cable, select a host type after the power-up beeps sound. See

Chapter 6, USB Interface

and

Chapter 7, RS-232 Interface

for specific host information. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connecting to a new host.

To return all features to default values, scan the Set Default Parameter on page 4-5

. Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (

*

) indicate default values.

*

Indicates Default

*

Enable Decode Aiming Pattern

(2)

Feature/Option

Option Value

5 - 2 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Scanning Sequence Examples

In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to disable image capture illumination, scan the Disable Image Capture Illumination

bar code under Image Capture Illumination on page

5-5 . The digital scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter

entry.

Other parameters require scanning several bar codes. See these parameter descriptions for this procedure.

Errors While Scanning

Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.

Imaging Preferences Parameter Defaults

Table 5-1

lists the defaults for imaging preferences parameters. To change the default values, scan the appropriate bar codes in this guide. These new values replace the standard default values in memory. To recall the default parameter values, scan the

Set Default Parameter on page 4-5 .

NOTE See

Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters

for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 5-1 Imaging Preferences Parameter Defaults

Parameter

Parameter

Number

Imaging Preferences

Operational Modes

Image Capture Illumination

N/A

361

Gain / Exposure Priority for Snapshot Mode 562

Snapshot Mode Timeout

Snapshot Aiming Pattern

Image Cropping

Crop to Pixel Addresses

323

300

301

315

316

317

318

Image Size (Number of Pixels)

Image Brightness (Target White)

JPEG Image Options

JPEG Target File Size

302

390

299

561

Default

N/A

Enable

Autodetect

0 (30 seconds)

Enable

Disable

0 top

0 left

479 bottom

751 right

Full

180

Quality

160 kB

5-10

5-11

5-11

5-12

Page

Number

5-7

5-8

5-9

5-4

5-5

5-6

5-7

Imaging Preferences 5 - 3

Table 5-1 Imaging Preferences Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Parameter

Number

JPEG Quality and Size Value

Image Enhancement

305

564

Image File Format Selection

Bits per Pixel (BPP)

Signature Capture

Signature Capture Image File Format

Selection

304

303

93

313

Signature Capture Bits per Pixel (BPP)

Signature Capture Width

Signature Capture Height

Signature Capture JPEG Quality

Video View Finder

Video View Finder Image Size

314

366

367

421

324

329

65

Off (0)

JPEG

8 BPP

Disable

JPEG

8 BPP

400

100

65

Disable

1700 bytes

Default

5-18

5-19

5-19

5-19

5-20

5-20

Page

Number

5-12

5-13

5-14

5-15

5-16

5-17

5 - 4 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Imaging Preferences

The parameters in this chapter control image capture characteristics. Image capture occurs in all modes of operation, including decode and snapshot.

Operational Modes

The digital scanner has two modes of operation:

• Decode Mode

• Snapshot Mode.

Decode Mode

By default, when you pull the trigger the digital scanner attempts to locate and decode enabled bar codes within its field of view. The digital scanner remains in this mode until it decodes a bar code or you release the trigger.

Snapshot Mode

Use Snapshot Mode to capture a high-quality image and transmit it to the host. To temporarily enter this mode scan the Snapshot Mode bar code. While in this mode the digital scanner blinks the green LED at 1-second intervals to indicate it is not in standard operating (decode) mode.

In Snapshot Mode, the digital scanner turns on its laser aiming pattern to highlight the area to capture in the image.

The next trigger pull instructs the digital scanner to capture a high quality image and transmit it to the host. A short time may pass (less than 2 seconds) between when the trigger is pulled and the image is captured as the digital scanner adjusts to the lighting conditions. Hold the digital scanner steady until the image is captured, denoted by a single beep.

If you do not press the trigger within the Snapshot Mode Timeout period, the digital scanner returns to Decode

Mode. Use

Snapshot Mode Timeout on page 5-7

to adjust this timeout period. The default timeout period is 30 seconds.

To disable the laser aiming pattern during Snapshot Mode, see

Snapshot Aiming Pattern on page 5-7

.

Snapshot Mode

Imaging Preferences 5 - 5

Image Capture Illumination

Parameter # 361

Selecting Enable Image Capture Illumination causes illumination to turn on during every image capture. Disable illumination to prevent the digital scanner from using illumination.

Enabling illumination usually results in superior images. The effectiveness of illumination decreases as the distance to the target increases.

*Enable Image Capture Illumination

(1)

Disable Image Capture Illumination

(0)

5 - 6 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Gain/Exposure Priority for Snapshot Mode

Parameter # 562

This parameter alters the digital scanner’s gain exposure priority when it acquires an image in Snapshot Mode in auto exposure mode.

• Scan Low Exposure Priority to set a mode in which the digital scanner favors higher gain over exposure to capture an image. This results in an image that is less susceptible to motion blur at the expense of noise artifacts. However, for most applications, the amount of noise is acceptable.

• Scan Low Gain Priority to set a mode in which the digital scanner favors longer exposure time rather than higher gain to capture an image. This ensures that the image is less noisy and produces fewer artifacts during post processing activities like image enhancement (sharpening). The mode is recommended for fixed mount / fixed object image capture since the image acquired is susceptible to motion blur.

• Scan Autodetect (default) to set a mode in which the digital scanner automatically selects Gain Priority or

Low Exposure Priority mode for Snapshot Mode. If the digital scanner is in a magnetic read switch enabled stand (or it is configured in Blink Mode), it uses Low Gain Priority mode. Otherwise, it uses the Low Exposure

Priority mode.

Low Gain Priority

(0)

Low Exposure Priority

(1)

*

Autodetect

(2)

Imaging Preferences 5 - 7

Snapshot Mode Timeout

Parameter # 323

This parameter sets the amount of time the digital scanner remains in Snapshot Mode. The digital scanner exits

Snapshot Mode when you pull the trigger, or when the Snapshot Mode Timeout elapses. To set this timeout value, scan the bar code below followed by a bar code from

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes . The default value is 0

which represents 30 seconds; values increment by 30. For example, 1 = 60 seconds, 2 = 90 seconds, etc.

Snapshot Mode Timeout

Snapshot Aiming Pattern

Parameter # 300

Select Enable Snapshot Aiming Pattern to project the aiming pattern when in Snapshot Mode, or Disable

Snapshot Aiming Pattern to turn the aiming pattern off.

*

Enable Snapshot Aiming Pattern

(1)

Disable Snapshot Aiming Pattern

(0)

5 - 8 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Image Cropping

Parameter # 301

This parameter crops a captured image. Select Disable Image Cropping to present the full 752 x 480 pixels.

Select Enable Image Cropping

to crop the image to the pixel addresses set in Crop to Pixel Addresses on page

5-9 .

Enable Image Cropping

(1)

*

Disable Image Cropping

(Use Full 752 x 480 Pixels)

(0)

Imaging Preferences 5 - 9

Crop to Pixel Addresses

Parameter # 315 (Top)

Parameter # 316 (Left)

Parameter # 317 (Bottom)

Parameter # 318 (Right)

If you selected Enable Image Cropping , set the pixel addresses from (0,0) to (751,479) to crop to.

Columns are numbered from 0 to 751, rows from 0 to 479. Specify four values for Top, Left, Bottom, and Right, where Top and Bottom correspond to row pixel addresses, and Left and Right correspond to column pixel addresses. For example, for a 4 row x 8 column image in the extreme bottom-right section of the image set the following values:

Top = 476, Bottom = 479, Left = 744, Right = 751

To set the crop to pixel address, scan each pixel address bar code below followed by three numeric bar codes representing the value. Leading zeros are required. For example, to crop the top pixel address to 3, scan 0, 0, 3.

See

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes

for numeric bar codes.

NOTE The digital scanner has a cropping resolution of 4 pixels. Setting the cropping area to less than 4 pixels

(after resolution adjustment, see Image Size (Number of Pixels) on page 5-10

) transfers the entire image.

Top Pixel Address

(0 - 479 Decimal)

Left Pixel Address

(0 - 751 Decimal)

Bottom Pixel Address

(0 - 479 Decimal)

Right Pixel Address

(0 - 751 Decimal)

5 - 10 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Image Size (Number of Pixels)

Parameter # 302

This option alters image resolution before compression. Multiple pixels are combined to one pixel, resulting in a smaller image containing the original content with reduced resolution.

Select one of the following values:

Full

1/2

1/4

Resolution

Value

Uncropped Image Size

752 x 480

376 x 240

180 x 120

*

Full Resolution

(0)

1/2 Resolution

(1)

1/4 Resolution

(3)

Imaging Preferences 5 - 11

Image Brightness (Target White)

Parameter # 390

Type: Byte

Range: 1 - 240

This parameter sets the Target White value used in Snapshot and Video Viewfinder mode when using auto exposure. White and black are defined as 240 decimal and 1, respectively. Setting the value to the factory default of 180 sets the white level of the image to ~180.

To set the Image Brightness parameter, scan Image Brightness below followed by three numeric bar codes representing the value. Leading zeros are required. For example, to set an Image Brightness value of 99, scan 0,

9, 9. See Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes for numeric bar codes.

*

180

Image Brightness

(3 digits)

JPEG Image Options

Parameter # 299

Select an option to optimize JPEG images for either size or for quality. Scan the JPEG Quality Selector bar code to enter a quality value; the digital scanner then selects the corresponding image size. Scan the JPEG Size

Selector bar code to enter a size value; the digital scanner then selects the best image quality.

*

JPEG Quality Selector

(1)

JPEG Size Selector

(0)

5 - 12 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

JPEG Target File Size

Parameter # 561

Type: Word

Range: 5-350

This parameter defines the target JPEG file size in terms 1 Kilobytes (1024 bytes). The default value is 160 kB which represents 160 Kilobytes.

!

CAUTION JPEG compress may take 10 to 15 seconds based on the amount of information in the target image.

Scanning JPEG Quality Selector

(default setting) on page 5-11 produces a compressed image that is

consistent in quality and compression time.

To set the JPEG Target File Size parameter, scan JPEG Target File Size below followed by three numeric bar codes representing the value. Leading zeros are required. For example, to set an Image Brightness value of 99,

scan 0, 9, 9 in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes

.

JPEG Target File Size

(3 digits)

JPEG Quality and Size Value

JPEG Quality = Parameter # 305

If you selected JPEG Quality Selector , scan the JPEG Quality Value bar code followed by 3 bar codes from

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to a value from 5 to 100, where 100 represents the highest quality

image.

JPEG Quality Value

(Default: 065)

(5 - 100 Decimal)

Imaging Preferences 5 - 13

Image Enhancement

Parameter # 564

This parameter configures the digital scanner's Image Enhance feature. This feature uses a combination of edge sharpening and contrast enhancement to produce an image that is visually pleasing.

The levels of image enhancement are:

• Off (0) - Default

• Low (1)

• Med (2)

• High (3).

*

Off

(0)

Low

(1)

Medium

(2)

High

(3)

5 - 14 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Image File Format Selector

Parameter # 304

Select an image format appropriate for the system (BMP, TIFF, or JPEG). The digital scanner stores captured images in the selected format.

BMP File Format

(3)

*

JPEG File Format

(1)

TIFF File Format

(4)

Imaging Preferences 5 - 15

Bits Per Pixel

Parameter # 303

Select the number of significant bits per pixel (BPP) to use when capturing an image. Select 1 BPP for a black and white image, 4 BPP to assign 1 of 16 levels of grey to each pixel, or 8 BPP to assign 1 of 256 levels of grey to each pixel.

NOTE The digital scanner ignores these settings for JPEG file formats, which only support 8 BPP .

The digital scanner ignores 1 BPP for TIFF file formats, which only support 4 BPP and

8 BPP . 1 BPP is coerced to 4 BPP for TIFF file formats.

1 BPP

(0)

4 BPP

(1)

*

8 BPP

(2)

5 - 16 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Signature Capture

Parameter # 93

A signature capture bar code is a special-purpose symbology which delineates a signature capture area in a document with a machine-readable format. The recognition pattern is variable so it can optionally provide an index to various signatures. The region inside the bar code pattern is considered the signature capture area. See

Appendix F, Signature Capture Code for more information.

Output File Format

Decoding a signature capture bar code de-skews the signature image and converts the image to a BMP, JPEG, or

TIFF file format. The output data includes the file descriptor followed by the formatted signature image.

Output Format

(1 byte)

JPEG - 1

BMP - 3

TIFF - 4

File Descriptor

Signature Type (1 byte)

1-8

Signature Image Size

(4 bytes)

(BIG Endian)

0x00000400

Signature Image

0x00010203….

To enable or disable Signature Capture, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Signature Capture

(1)

*

Disable Signature Capture

(0)

Imaging Preferences 5 - 17

Signature Capture File Format Selector

Parameter # 313

Select a signature file format appropriate for the system (BMP, TIFF, or JPEG). The digital scanner stores captured signatures in the selected format.

BMP Signature Format

(3)

*

JPEG Signature Format

(1)

TIFF Signature Format

(4)

5 - 18 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Signature Capture Bits Per Pixel

Parameter # 314

Select the number of significant bits per pixel (BPP) to use when capturing a signature. Select 1 BPP for a black and white image, 4 BPP to assign 1 of 16 levels of grey to each pixel, or 8 BPP to assign 1 of 256 levels of grey to each pixel.

NOTE The digital scanner ignores these settings for JPEG file formats, which only support 8 BPP .

1 BPP

(0)

4 BPP

(1)

*

8 BPP

(2)

Imaging Preferences 5 - 19

Signature Capture Width

Parameter # 366

The aspect ratio of the Signature Capture Width and Signature Capture Height parameters must match that of the signature capture area. For example, a 4 x 1 inch signature capture area would require a 4 to 1 aspect ratio of width to height.

To set the width of the signature capture box, scan the Signature Capture Width bar code, followed by 3 bar

codes from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to a value in the range of 001 to 752 decimal.

Signature Capture Width

(Default: 400)

(001 - 752 Decimal)

Signature Capture Height

Parameter # 367

To set the height of the signature capture box, scan the Signature Capture Height bar code, followed by 3 bar

codes from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to a value in the range of 001 to 480 decimal.

Signature Capture Height (Default: 100)

(001 - 480 Decimal)

Signature Capture JPEG Quality

Parameter # 421

Scan the JPEG Quality Value

bar code followed by 3 bar codes from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes

corresponding to a value from 005 to 100, where 100 represents the highest quality image.

JPEG Quality Value (Default: 065)

(5 - 100 Decimal)

5 - 20 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Video View Finder

Parameter # 324

Select Enable Video View Finder to project the video view finder, or Disable Video View Finder to turn the video view finder off.

*

Disable Video View Finder

(0)

Enable Video View Finder

(1)

Video View Finder Image Size

Parameter # 329

Select the number of 100-byte blocks. Values range from 800 to 3000 bytes. Selecting a smaller value transmits more frames per second; selecting a larger value increases video quality.

To set the Video View Finder Image Size, scan the bar code below followed by two bar codes from Appendix D,

Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to the 100-byte value from 800 to 3000 bytes. For example, to select 1500

bytes, enter 1, 5. To select 900 bytes, enter 0, 9.

Video View Finder Image Size

Chapter 6 USB Interface

Introduction

This chapter describes how to set up the digital scanner with a USB host. The digital scanner connects directly to a

USB host, or a powered USB hub, which powers it. No additional power supply is required.

Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (

*

) indicate default values.

*

Indicates Default

*

North American Standard USB Keyboard Feature/Option

NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars and/or spaces are not merging.

6 - 2 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Connecting a USB Interface

USB Series A Connector

Interface cable

Figure 6-1 USB Connection

The digital scanner connects with USB-capable hosts including:

• Desktop PCs and notebooks

• Apple™ iMac, G4, iBooks (North America only)

• IBM SurePOS terminals

• Sun, IBM, and other network computers that support more than one keyboard.

The following operating systems support the digital scanner through USB:

• Windows

®

98, 2000, ME, XP

• MacOS 8.5 - MacOS 10.3

• IBM 4690 OS.

The digital scanner also interfaces with other USB hosts which support USB Human Interface Devices (HID).

To set up the digital scanner:

NOTE

Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 6-1 are examples

only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the digital scanner are the same.

1.

Connect the modular connector of the USB interface cable to the cable interface port on the digital scanner

(see Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-3 ).

2.

Plug the series A connector in the USB host or hub, or plug the Plus Power connector in an available port of the IBM SurePOS terminal.

3.

Select the USB device type by scanning the appropriate bar code from

USB Device Type on page 6-4

.

4.

On first installation when using Windows, the software prompts to select or install the Human Interface Device driver. To install this driver, provided by Windows, click Next through all the choices and click Finished on the last choice. The digital scanner powers up during this installation.

5.

To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.

If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 3-2 .

USB Interface 6 - 3

USB Parameter Defaults

Table 6-1 lists the defaults for USB host parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s)

provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 6-4

.

NOTE See

Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters

for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 6-1 USB Interface Parameter Defaults

Parameter

USB Host Parameters

USB Device Type

Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status Handshaking

USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes)

USB Keystroke Delay

USB CAPS Lock Override

USB Ignore Unknown Characters

Emulate Keypad

Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero

USB FN1 Substitution

Function Key Mapping

Simulated Caps Lock

Convert Case

USB Static CDC

USB Polling Interval

Quick Keypad Emulation

Default

Disable

Disable

Disable

None

Enable

8 msec

Disable

HID Keyboard Emulation

6-4

Enable

6-5

North American

No Delay

6-6

6-8

Disable

Enable

Disable

Disable

6-8

6-9

6-9

6-10

6-10

6-11

6-11

6-12

6-12

6-13

6-15

Page

Number

6 - 4 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

USB Host Parameters

USB Device Type

Select the desired USB device type.

NOTE When changing USB Device Types, the digital scanner automatically resets and issues the standard startup beep sequences.

NOTE Before selecting USB CDC Host , install the CDC INF file on the host to ensure the scanner does not stall during power up (due to a failure to enumerate USB). If the scanner stalls, to recover it:

1) Install the CDC INF file or

2) After power-up, hold the trigger for 10 seconds, which allows the scanner to power up using an alternate USB configuration. Upon power-up, scan another USB Device Type .

*

HID Keyboard Emulation

IBM Table Top USB

IBM Hand-Held USB

USB OPOS Handheld

USB Interface 6 - 5

USB Device Type (continued)

Simple COM Port Emulation

USB CDC Host

Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging Interface

Symbol Native API (SNAPI) without Imaging Interface

Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status Handshaking

After selecting a SNAPI interface as the USB device type, select whether to enable or disable status handshaking.

*

Enable SNAPI Status Handshaking

Disable SNAPI Status Handshaking

6 - 6 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

USB Country Keyboard Types - Country Codes

Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type. This setting applies only to the USB HID Keyboard

Emulation device.

NOTE When changing USB country keyboard types the digital scanner automatically resets and issues the standard startup beep sequences.

*

North American Standard USB Keyboard

German Windows

French Windows

French Canadian Windows 95/98

French Canadian Windows 2000/XP

USB Country Keyboard Types - Country Codes (continued)

French Belgian Windows

Spanish Windows

USB Interface 6 - 7

Italian Windows

Swedish Windows

UK English Windows

Japanese Windows (ASCII)

Portuguese-Brazilian Windows

6 - 8 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

USB Keystroke Delay

This parameter sets the delay, in milliseconds, between emulated keystrokes. Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when hosts require a slower transmission of data.

*

No Delay

Medium Delay (20 msec)

Long Delay (40 msec)

USB CAPS Lock Override

This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device. Enable this to preserve the case of the data regardless of the state of the Caps Lock key. This setting is always enabled for the Japanese, Windows (ASCII) keyboard type and can not be disabled.

Override Caps Lock Key

(Enable)

*

Do Not Override Caps Lock Key

(Disable)

USB Interface 6 - 9

USB Ignore Unknown Characters

This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device and IBM device. Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. Select Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters to send all bar code data except for unknown characters. The digital scanner issues no error beeps.

Select Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters , for IBM devices, to prevent sending bar codes containing at least one unknown character are to the host, or for HID Keyboard Emulation devices, this sends the bar code characters up to the unknown character. The digital scanner issues an error beep.

*

Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters

(Transmit)

Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters

(Disable)

Emulate Keypad

Enable this to send all characters as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad. For example ASCII A transmits as

“ALT make” 0 6 5 “ALT Break”.

*

Disable Keypad Emulation

Enable Keypad Emulation

6 - 10 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero

Enable this to send character sequences sent over the numeric keypad as ISO characters which have a leading zero. For example ASCII A transmits as “ALT MAKE” 0 0 6 5 “ALT BREAK”.

*

Disable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero

Enable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero

USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution

This option applies only to the USB HID Keyboard Emulation device. Enable this to replace any FN 1 characters in an EAN 128 bar code with a user-selected Key Category and value

(see FN1 Substitution Values on page 4-51

to set the Key Category and Key Value).

Enable

*

Disable

USB Interface 6 - 11

Function Key Mapping

ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as a control-key sequences (see Table 6-2 on page 6-16 ). Enable this

parameter to send the keys in bold in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not you enable this parameter.

*

Disable Function Key Mapping

Enable Function Key Mapping

Simulated Caps Lock

Enable this to invert upper and lower case characters on the bar code as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on the keyboard. This inversion occurs regardless of the keyboard’s Caps Lock state.

*

Disable Simulated Caps Lock

Enable Simulated Caps Lock

6 - 12 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Convert Case

Enable this to convert all bar code data to the selected case.

*

No Case Conversion

Convert All to Upper Case

Convert All to Lower Case

USB Static CDC

When disabled, each device connected consumes another COM port (first device = COM1, second device = COM2, third device = COM3, etc.)

When enabled, each device connects to the same COM port.

*Enable USB Static CDC

Disable USB Static CDC

USB Interface 6 - 13

USB Polling Interval

This option applies only to the USB HID Keyboard Emulation Device. Scan a bar code below to set the polling interval. The polling interval determines the rate at which data can be sent between the scanner and the host computer. A lower number indicates a faster data rate.

CAUTION Ensure your host machine can handle the selected data rate. Selecting a data rate that is too fast for your host machine may result in lost data.

1 msec

2 msec

3msec

4 msec

6 - 14 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

USB Polling Interval (continued)

5 msec

7 msec

9 msec

6 msec

*

8 msec

USB Interface 6 - 15

Quick Keypad Emulation

This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation Device and if Emulate Keypad is enabled. This parameter enables a quicker method of keypad emulation where ASCII sequences are only sent for ASCII characters not found on the keyboard. The default value is Disable .

Enable

*

Disable

6 - 16 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

ASCII Character Set for USB

Table 6-2 USB Prefix/Suffix Values

Prefix/ Suffix Value

Full ASCII Code 39

Encode Char.acter

1000

1001

1002

1003

1004

1005

%U

$A

$B

$C

$D

$E

CTRL 2

CTRL A

CTRL B

CTRL C

CTRL D

CTRL E

CTRL F

CTRL G

Keystroke

1006

1007

1008

$F

$G

$H

1009

1010

1011

1012

1013

1014

1015

1016

1017

1018

1019

1020

1021

$I

$J

$K

$L

$M

$N

$O

$P

$Q

$R

$S

$T

$U

CTRL H/ BACKSPACE

1

CTRL I/ HORIZONTAL TAB

1

CTRL J

CTRL K

CTRL L

CTRL M/ ENTER

1

CTRL N

CTRL O

CTRL P

CTRL Q

CTRL R

CTRL S

CTRL T

CTRL U

1022

1023

$V

$W

CTRL V

CTRL W

1024 $X CTRL X

1

The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enable

Function Key Mapping on page

6-11

. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke transmits.

Table 6-2 USB Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)

Prefix/ Suffix Value

Full ASCII Code 39

Encode Char.acter

1025

1026

1027

1028

1029

1030

1031

1032

1033

1034

1035

$Y

$Z

%A

%B

%C

%D

%E

Space

/A

/B

/C

Keystroke

CTRL Y

CTRL Z

CTRL [/ ESC

1

CTRL \

CTRL ]

CTRL 6

CTRL -

&

$

%

#

!

Space

1036

1037

1038

1039

1040

1041

1042

1043

1044

1045

1046

1047

/D

/E

/F

/G

/H

/I

/J

/K

/L

-

.

/O /

.

,

*

+

(

)

-

1048

1049

1050

1051

0

1

2

3

0

1

2

3

1052 4 4

1

The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enable Function Key Mapping on page

6-11 . Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke transmits.

USB Interface 6 - 17

6 - 18 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Table 6-2 USB Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)

Prefix/ Suffix Value

Full ASCII Code 39

Encode Char.acter

1053

1054

1055

1056

1057

1058

1059

1060

1061

1062

1063

1064

1065

1066

1067

1068

1069

1070

1071

1072

1073

1074

1075

1076

1077

1078

I

5

6

7

8

9

/Z

%F

%G

%H

%I

%J

%V

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

J

K

L

M

N

;

5

6

7

8

:

9

<

=

>

?

@

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

Keystroke

1079 O O

1080 P P

1

The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enable Function Key Mapping on page

6-11 . Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke transmits.

Table 6-2 USB Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)

Prefix/ Suffix Value

Full ASCII Code 39

Encode Char.acter

1081

1082

1083

1084

1085

1086

1087

1088

1089

1090

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

%K

%L

%M

%N

%O

%W

+A

+B

+C

+D

+E

+F

\

[

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

Keystroke

1091

1092

1093

1094

1095

1096

1097

1098

1099

1100

1101

1102

1103

1104

1105

1106

+G

+H

+I

+J

]

^

_

` a b c d f e j i g h

1107 +K k

1108 +L l

1

The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enable Function Key Mapping on page

6-11 . Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke transmits.

USB Interface 6 - 19

6 - 20 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Table 6-2 USB Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)

Prefix/ Suffix Value

Full ASCII Code 39

Encode Char.acter

1109

1110

1111

1112

1113

1114

1115

1116

1117

1118

1119

1120

1121

1122

1123

1124

+M

+N

+O

+P

+Q

+R

+S

+T

+U

+V

+W

+X

+Y

+Z

%P

%Q t

| m n o p q r s u v w x y z

{

Keystroke

1125 %R }

1126 %S ~

1

The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enable Function Key Mapping on page

6-11 . Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke transmits.

2078

2079

2080

2081

2082

2083

2084

2085

2086

2087

2088

2089

2090

2070

2071

2072

2073

2074

2075

2076

2077

Table 6-3 USB ALT Key Character Set

ALT Keys

2064

2065

ALT 2

ALT A

2066

2067

2068

2069

ALT B

ALT C

ALT D

ALT E

ALT F

ALT G

ALT H

ALT I

ALT J

ALT K

ALT L

ALT M

ALT N

ALT O

ALT P

ALT Q

ALT R

ALT S

ALT T

ALT U

ALT V

ALT W

ALT X

ALT Y

ALT Z

Keystroke

USB Interface 6 - 21

6 - 22 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

3054

3055

3056

3057

3065

3066

3067

3068

Table 6-4 USB GUI Key Character Set

3000

GUI Key Keystroke

Right Control Key

3048

3049

GUI 0

GUI 1

3050

3051

3052

3053

GUI 2

GUI 3

GUI 4

GUI 5

GUI 6

GUI 7

GUI 8

GUI 9

GUI A

GUI B

GUI C

GUI D

3069

3070

3071

3072

3073

3074

3075

3076

GUI E

GUI F

GUI G

GUI H

GUI I

GUI J

GUI K

GUI L

3077

3078

3079

3080

GUI M

GUI N

GUI O

GUI P

Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar.

Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.

Table 6-4 USB GUI Key Character Set (Continued)

GUI Key Keystroke

3081

3082

GUI Q

GUI R

3083

3084

3085

3086

GUI S

GUI T

GUI U

GUI V

3087

3088

3089

3090

GUI W

GUI X

GUI Y

GUI Z

Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar.

Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.

USB Interface 6 - 23

6 - 24 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

5015

5016

5017

5018

5019

5020

5021

5022

5023

5024

5007

5008

5009

5010

5011

5012

5013

5014

Table 6-5 USB F Key Character Set

F Keys

5001

5002

F1

F2

5003

5004

5005

5006

F3

F4

F5

F6

F11

F12

F13

F14

F7

F8

F9

F10

F19

F20

F21

F22

F15

F16

F17

F18

F23

F24

Keystroke

6048

6049

6050

6051

6052

6053

6054

6055

Table 6-6 USB Numeric Keypad Character Set

Numeric Keypad Keystroke

6042

6043

*

+

6044

6045

6046

6047

.

/ undefined

-

6056

6057

6058

6059

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Enter

Num Lock

USB Interface 6 - 25

6 - 26 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

7007

7008

7009

7010

7011

7012

7013

7014

Table 6-7 USB Extended Keypad Character Set

Extended Keypad Keystroke

7001

7002

Break

Delete

7003

7004

7005

7006

PgUp

End

Pg Dn

Pause

7015

7016

7017

7018

Scroll Lock

Backspace

Tab

Print Screen

Insert

Home

Enter

Escape

Up Arrow

Down Arrow

Left Arrow

Right Arrow

Chapter 7 RS-232 Interface

Introduction

This chapter describes how to set up the digital scanner with an RS-232 host. Use the RS-232 interface to connect the digital scanner to point-of-sale devices, host computers, or other devices with an available RS-232 port (e.g., com port).

If your host does not appear in

Table 7-2 , refer to the documentation for the host device to set communication

parameters to match the host.

NOTE T he digital scanner uses TTL RS-232 signal levels, which interface with most system architectures. For system architectures requiring RS-232C signal levels, Zebra offers different cables providing

TTL-to-RS-232C conversion. Contact Zebra Support for more information.

Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (

*

) indicate default values.

*

Indicates Default

*

Baud Rate 57,600 Feature/Option

NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars and/or spaces are not merging.

7 - 2 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Connecting an RS-232 Interface

Connect the digital scanner directly to the host computer.

Serial Port Connector to Host

Interface cable

Power supply cable

Figure 7-1 RS-232 Direct Connection

NOTE

Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 7-1 are examples

only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the digital scanner are the same.

1.

Attach the modular connector of the RS-232 interface cable to the cable interface port on the digital scanner

(see Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-3 ).

2.

Connect the other end of the RS-232 interface cable to the serial port on the host.

3.

Connect the power supply to the serial connector end of the RS-232 interface cable. Plug the power supply into an appropriate outlet.

4.

Select the RS-232 host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from

RS-232 Host Types on page 7-6 .

5.

To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.

RS-232 Interface 7 - 3

RS-232 Parameter Defaults

Table 7-1 lists the defaults for RS-232 host parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s)

provided in the RS-232 Host Parameters section beginning on page 7-4 .

NOTE See

Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters

for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 7-1 RS-232 Host Default Table

Parameter Default

RS-232 Host Parameters

RS-232 Host Types

Baud Rate

Parity Type

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Check Receive Errors

Hardware Handshaking

Software Handshaking

Host Serial Response Time-out

RTS Line State

Beep on <BEL>

Intercharacter Delay

Nixdorf Beep/LED Options

Ignore Unknown Characters

Note: The DS3508 supports one stop bit only.

Standard

9600

None

8-Bit

1 Stop Bit

Enable

None

None

2 Sec

Low RTS

Disable

0 msec

Normal Operation

Send Bar Code

Page

Number

7-15

7-16

7-16

7-17

7-18

7-18

7-10

7-10

7-11

7-13

7-6

7-8

7-9

7-9

7 - 4 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

RS-232 Host Parameters

Various RS-232 hosts use their own parameter default settings. Selecting standard, ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf

Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, OPOS/JPOS, Olivetti, Omron or Common Use Terminal Equipment

(CUTE-LP/LG) sets the defaults listed in

Table 7-2 .

Table 7-2 Terminal Specific RS-232

Parameter

Transmit Code ID Yes

ICL Fujitsu

Yes

Wincor-

Nixdorf

Mode A

Yes

Wincor-

Nixdorf Mode

B/OPOS/JPOS

Yes

Olivetti

Yes

Omron

Yes

CUTE

Yes

Data

Transmission

Format

Suffix

Data/Suffix Data/Suffix Data/Suffix

CR (1013) CR (1013) CR (1013)

Data/Suffix

CR (1013)

Prefix/Data/

Suffix

Data/Suffix Prefix/Data/

Suffix

ETX (1002) CR (1013)

Baud Rate

Parity

Hardware

Handshaking

Software

Handshaking

Serial Response

Time-out

Stop Bit Select

ASCII Format

Beep On <BEL>

RTS Line State

9600

Even

RTS/CTS

Option 3

None

9.9 Sec.

One

8-Bit

Disable

High

9600

None

None

None

2 Sec.

One

8-Bit

Disable

Low

9600

Odd

RTS/CTS

Option 3

None

9.9 Sec.

One

8-Bit

Disable

Low

9600

Odd

RTS/CTS Option

3

None

9.9 Sec.

One

8-Bit

Disable

Low = No data to send

9600

Even

None

Ack/Nak

9.9 Sec.

One

7-Bit

Disable

Low

9600

None

None

None

9.9 Sec.

One

8-Bit

Disable

High

CR (1013)

ETX (1003)

9600

Even

None

None

9.9 Sec.

One

7-Bit

Disable

High

Prefix None None None None STX (1003) None STX (1002)

*In the Nixdorf Mode B, if CTS is low, scanning is disabled. When CTS is high, scanning is enabled.

** If you scan Nixdorf Mode B without connecting the digital scanner to the proper host, it may appear unable to scan. If this happens, scan a different RS-232 host type within 5 seconds of cycling power to the digital scanner.

The CUTE host disables all parameter scanning, including Set Defaults. If you inadvertently select CUTE,

scan *Enable Parameter Bar Code Scanning (1) on page 4-6 , then change the host selection.

RS-232 Interface 7 - 5

RS-232 Host Parameters (continued)

Selecting ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, OPOS/JPOS, Olivetti, Omron or Common

Use Terminal Equipment (CUTE-LP/LG) enables the transmission of code ID characters listed in Table 7-3

. These code ID characters are not programmable and are separate from the Transmit Code ID feature. Do not enable the

Transmit Code ID feature for these terminals.

Table 7-3 Terminal Specific Code ID Characters

Code Type ICL Fujitsu

Wincor-

Nixdorf

Mode A

UPC-A

UPC-E

EAN-8/JAN-8

EAN-13/JAN-13

A

E

FF

F

A

E

FF

F

A

C

B

A

Code 39

Codabar

Code 128

I 2 of 5

Code 93

D 2 of 5

GS1-128

MSI

C <len>

N <len>

L <len>

I <len>

None

H <len>

L <len>

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

I

M

N

K

L

H

P

O

Bookland EAN

Trioptic

Code 11

IATA

Code 32

PDF417

Datamatrix

QR Codes

Aztec/Aztec Rune None

MicroPDF None

Maxicode None

F

None

None

H<len>

None

None

None

None

F

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

V

S

T

A

None

None

H

R

U

None

Q

V

S

R

U

T

None

H

None

Q

L

H

I

K

P

O

A

None

M

N

B

A

A

C

Wincor-Nixdorf

Mode B/

OPOS/JPOS

A

C

Olivetti

B

A

M <len>

N <len>

K <len>

I <len>

L <len>

H <len>

P <len>

O <len>

A

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

Omron

None

H <len>

L <len>

None

F

None

None

None

A

E

FF

F

C <len>

N <len>

L <len>

I <len>

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

CUTE

A

None

None

A

5

1

3

None

None

2

5

None

None

None

None

2

4

7

None

6

8

None

None

7 - 6 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

RS-232 Host Types

To select an RS-232 host interface, scan one of the following bar codes.

Standard RS-232

1

ICL RS-232

Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A

Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode B

Olivetti ORS4500

Omron

OPOS/JPOS

RS-232 Interface 7 - 7

RS-232 Host Types (continued)

Fujitsu RS-232

CUTE

2

1

Scanning Standard RS-232 activates the RS-232 driver, but does not change port settings (e.g., parity, data bits, handshaking). Selecting another RS-232 host type bar code changes these settings.

2

The CUTE host disables all parameter scanning, including Set Defaults. If you inadvertently select CUTE, scan

*Enable Parameter Bar Code Scanning (1) on page 4-6

, then change the host selection.

7 - 8 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Baud Rate

Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Set the digital scanner's baud rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device. Otherwise, data may not reach the host device or may reach it in distorted form.

*

Baud Rate 9600

Baud Rate 19,200

Baud Rate 38,400

Baud Rate 57,600

Baud Rate 115,200

RS-232 Interface 7 - 9

Parity

A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Select the parity type according to host device requirements.

• Select Odd parity to set the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains an odd number of 1 bits.

• Select Even parity to set the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains an even number of 1 bits.

• Select None when no parity bit is required.

Odd

Even

*

None

Data Bits

This parameter allows the digital scanner to interface with devices requiring a 7-bit or 8-bit ASCII protocol.

7-Bit

*

8-Bit

7 - 10 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Stop Bit Select

The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream. Select the number of stop bits (one or two) based on the number the receiving terminal is programmed to accommodate. Set the number of stop bits to match host device requirements.

*

1 Stop Bit

2 Stop Bits

Check Receive Errors

Select whether or not to check the parity, framing, and overrun of received characters. The parity value of received characters is verified against the parity parameter selected above.

*

Check For Received Errors

Do Not Check For Received Errors

RS-232 Interface 7 - 11

Hardware Handshaking

The data interface consists of an RS-232 port designed to operate either with or without the hardware handshaking lines, Request to Send (RTS), and Clear to Send (CTS).

Disable Standard RTS/CTS handshaking to transmit scan data as it becomes available. Select Standard RTS/CTS handshaking to transmit scan data according to the following sequence:

• The digital scanner reads the CTS line for activity. If CTS is asserted, the scanner waits up to Host Serial

Response Time-out for the host to de-assert the CTS line. If, after Host Serial Response Time-out (default), the CTS line is still asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error, and discards any scanned data.

• When the CTS line is de-asserted, the digital scanner asserts the RTS line and waits up to Host Serial

Response Time-out for the host to assert CTS. When the host asserts CTS, the scanner transmits data. If, after Host Serial Response Time-out (default), the CTS line is not asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error, and discards the data.

• When data transmission completes, the digital scanner de-asserts RTS 10 msec after sending the last character.

• The host should respond by negating CTS. The digital scanner checks for a de-asserted CTS upon the next transmission of data.

During the transmission of data, the CTS line should be asserted. If CTS is deasserted for more than 50 ms between characters, the digital scanner aborts transmission, sounds a transmission error, and discards the data.

If this communication sequence fails, the digital scanner issues an error indication. In this case, the data is lost and must be rescanned.

If hardware handshaking and software handshaking are both enabled, hardware handshaking takes precedence.

NOTE The DTR signal is jumpered to the active state.

7 - 12 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Hardware Handshaking (continued)

• None : Scan this bar code to disable hardware handshaking.

• Standard RTS/CTS : Scan this bar code to select Standard RTS/CTS Hardware Handshaking.

• RTS/CTS Option 1 : If you select RTS/CTS Option 1, the digital scanner asserts RTS before transmitting and ignores the state of CTS. The scanner de-asserts RTS when the transmission completes.

• RTS/CTS Option 2 : If you select Option 2, RTS is always high or low (user-programmed logic level).

However, the digital scanner waits for CTS to be asserted before transmitting data. If CTS is not asserted within Host Serial Response Time-out (default), the scanner issues an error indication and discards the data.

• RTS/CTS Option 3 : If you select Option 3, the digital scanner asserts RTS prior to any data transmission, regardless of the state of CTS. The scanner waits up to Host Serial Response Time-out (default) for CTS to be asserted. If CTS is not asserted during this time, the scanner issues an error indication and discards the data. The digital scanner de-asserts RTS when transmission is complete.

*

None

Standard RTS/CTS

RTS/CTS Option 1

RTS/CTS Option 2

RTS/CTS Option 3

RS-232 Interface 7 - 13

Software Handshaking

This parameter offers control of the data transmission process in addition to, or instead of, that offered by hardware handshaking. There are five options.

If software handshaking and hardware handshaking are both enabled, hardware handshaking takes precedence.

• None : Select this to transmit data immediately. The digital scanner expects no response from the host.

• ACK/NAK : If you select this option, after transmitting data, the digital scanner expects either an ACK or NAK response from the host. When it receives a NAK, the scanner transmits the same data again and waits for either an ACK or NAK. After three unsuccessful attempts to send data after receiving NAKs, the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data.

The digital scanner waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Time-out to receive an ACK or NAK.

If the scanner does not get a response in this time, it issues an error indication and discards the data. There are no retries when a time-out occurs.

• ENQ : If you select this option, the digital scanner waits for an ENQ character from the host before transmitting data. If it does not receive an ENQ within the Host Serial Response Time-out, the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data. The host must transmit an ENQ character at least every

Host Serial Response Time-out to prevent transmission errors.

• ACK/NAK with ENQ : This combines the two previous options. For re-transmissions of data, due to a NAK from the host, an additional ENQ is not required.

• XON/XOFF : An XOFF character turns the digital scanner transmission off until the scanner receives an XON character. There are two situations for XON/XOFF:

• The digital scanner receives an XOFF before has data to send. When the scanner has data to send, it waits up to Host Serial Response Time-out for an XON character before transmission. If it does not receive the XON within this time, the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data.

• The digital scanner receives an XOFF during a transmission. Data transmission then stops after sending the current byte. When the digital scanner receives an XON character, it sends the rest of the data message. The digital scanner waits indefinitely for the XON.

7 - 14 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Software Handshaking (continued)

*

None

ENQ

XON/XOFF

ACK/NAK

ACK/NAK with ENQ

RS-232 Interface 7 - 15

Host Serial Response Time-out

This parameter specifies how long the digital scanner waits for an ACK, NAK, or CTS before determining that a transmission error occurred. This only applies when in one of the ACK/NAK software handshaking modes, or

RTS/CTS hardware handshaking mode.

*

Minimum: 2 Sec

Low: 2.5 Sec

Medium: 5 Sec

High: 7.5 Sec

Maximum: 9.9 Sec

7 - 16 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

RTS Line State

This parameter sets the idle state of the Serial Host RTS line. Scan a bar code below to select Low RTS or High

RTS line state.

*

Host: Low RTS

Host: High RTS

Beep on <BEL>

If you enable this parameter, the digital scanner issues a beep when it detects a <BEL> character on the RS-232 serial line. <BEL> indicates an illegal entry or other important event.

Beep On <BEL> Character

(Enable)

*

Do Not Beep On <BEL> Character

(Disable)

RS-232 Interface 7 - 17

Intercharacter Delay

This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay inserted between character transmissions.

*

Minimum: 0 msec

Low: 25 msec

Medium: 50 msec

High: 75 msec

Maximum: 99 msec

7 - 18 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Nixdorf Beep/LED Options

If you selected Nixdorf Mode B, this indicates when the digital scanner beeps and turns on its LED after a decode.

*

Normal Operation

(Beep/LED immediately after decode)

Beep/LED After Transmission

Beep/LED After CTS Pulse

Ignore Unknown Characters

Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. Select Send Bar Codes with Unknown

Characters to send all bar code data except for unknown characters. The digital scanner issues no error beeps.

Select Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters to send bar code data up to the first unknown character. The digital scanner issues an error beep.

*

Send Bar Code

(with unknown characters)

Do Not Send Bar Codes

(with unknown characters)

RS-232 Interface 7 - 19

ASCII Character Set for RS-232

1020

1021

1022

1023

1024

1025

1026

1012

1013

1014

1015

1016

1017

1018

1019

1004

1005

1006

1007

1008

1009

1010

1011

You can assign the values in

Table 7-4 as prefixes or suffixes for ASCII character data transmission.

Table 7-4 Prefix/Suffix Values

Prefix/Suffix

Value

Full ASCII

Code 39 Encode Character

ASCII Character

1000

1001

1002

1003

%U

$A

$B

$C

NUL

SOH

STX

ETX

$D

$E

$F

$G

$H

$I

$J

$K

EOT

ENQ

ACK

BELL

BCKSPC

HORIZ TAB

LF/NW LN

VT

$L

$M

$N

$O

$P

$Q

$R

$S

$T

$U

$V

$W

$X

$Y

$Z

FF

CR/ENTER

SO

SI

DLE

DC1/XON

DC2

DC3/XOFF

DC4

NAK

SYN

ETB

CAN

EM

SUB

7 - 20 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

1049

1050

1051

1052

1053

1054

1055

1056

1041

1042

1043

1044

1045

1046

1047

1048

1033

1034

1035

1036

1037

1038

1039

1040

Table 7-4 Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)

Prefix/Suffix

Value

Full ASCII

Code 39 Encode Character

1027

1028

%A

%B

1029

1030

1031

1032

%C

%D

%E

Space

/A

/B

/C

/D

/E

/F

/G

/H

.

/I

/J

/K

/L

-

/O

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

ASCII Character

5

6

3

4

7

8

1

2

/

0

.

-

,

+

)

*

(

%

&

#

$

ESC

FS

GS

RS

!

"

US

Space

1079

1080

1081

1082

1083

1084

1085

1086

1071

1072

1073

1074

1075

1076

1077

1078

1063

1064

1065

1066

1067

1068

1069

1070

Table 7-4 Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)

Prefix/Suffix

Value

Full ASCII

Code 39 Encode Character

1057

1058

9

/Z

1059

1060

1061

1062

%F

%G

%H

%I

%J

%V

A

B

C

D

E

F

I

G

H

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

S

T

Q

R

U

V

O

P

M

N

K

L

I

J

G

H

E

F

C

D

A

B

=

>

?

@

;

<

:

9

ASCII Character

RS-232 Interface 7 - 21

7 - 22 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

1113

1114

1115

1116

1109

1110

1111

1112

1101

1102

1103

1104

1105

1106

1107

1108

1093

1094

1095

1096

1097

1098

1099

1100

Table 7-4 Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)

Prefix/Suffix

Value

Full ASCII

Code 39 Encode Character

1087

1088

W

X

1089

1090

1091

1092

Y

Z

%K

%L

%M

%N

%O

%W

+A

+B

+C

+D

+E

+F

+G

+H

+I

+J

+K

+L

+M

+N

+O

+P

+Q

+R

+S

+T q r o p t s m n l k j i g h f e c d a b

_

`

]

^

\

[

Y

Z

W

X

ASCII Character

1123

1124

1125

1126

1127

7013

Table 7-4 Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)

Prefix/Suffix

Value

Full ASCII

Code 39 Encode Character

1117

1118

+U

+V

1119

1120

1121

1122

+W

+X

+Y

+Z

%P

%Q

%R

%S

ASCII Character

|

{ y z w x u v

}

~

Undefined

ENTER

RS-232 Interface 7 - 23

7 - 24 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Chapter 8 IBM 468X / 469X Interface

Introduction

This chapter describes how to set up the digital scanner with an IBM 468X/469X host.

Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (

*

) indicate default values.

* Indicates Default

*

Disable Convert to Code 39

Feature/Option

NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars and/or spaces are not merging.

8 - 2 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Connecting to an IBM 468X/469X Host

Connect the digital scanner directly to the host interface.

Host Port Connector

Interface cable

Figure 8-1 IBM Direct Connection

NOTE

Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 8-1 are examples

only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the digital scanner are the same.

1.

Attach the modular connector of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the cable interface port on the digital scanner.

See

Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-3

.

2.

Connect the other end of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the appropriate port on the host (typically Port 9).

3.

Select the port address by scanning the appropriate bar code from Port Address on page 8-4

.

4.

To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.

NOTE The only required configuration is the port address. The IBM system typically controls other digital scanner parameters.

IBM 468X / 469X Interface 8 - 3

IBM Parameter Defaults

Table 8-1 lists the defaults for IBM host parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s)

provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 8-4

.

NOTE See

Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters

for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 8-1 IBM Host Default Table

Parameter

IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters

Port Address

Convert Unknown to Code 39

Default

None Selected

Disable

8-4

8-5

Page

Number

8 - 4 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters

Port Address

This parameter sets the IBM 468X/469X port used.

NOTE Scanning one of these bar codes enables the RS-485 interface on the digital scanner.

None Selected

Hand-Held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B)

Non-IBM Scanner Emulation (Port 5B)

Table Top Scanner Emulation (Port 17)

IBM 468X / 469X Interface 8 - 5

Convert Unknown to Code 39

Scan a bar code below to enable or disable the conversion of unknown bar code type data to Code 39.

Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39

*

Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39

8 - 6 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Chapter 9 Keyboard Wedge Interface

Introduction

This chapter describes how to set up a Keyboard Wedge interface with the digital scanner. With this interface, the digital scanner is connected between the keyboard and host computer, and translates bar code data into keystrokes. The host computer accepts the keystrokes as if they originated from the keyboard. This mode adds bar code reading functionality to a system designed for manual keyboard input. Keyboard keystrokes are simply passed through.

Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (

*

) indicate default values.

* Indicates Default

*

North American Feature/Option

NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.

9 - 2 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface

Male DIN Host Connector

Y-cable

Keyboard Connector Female DIN Keyboard Connector

Figure 9-1 Keyboard Wedge Connection with Y-cable

To connect the Keyboard Wedge interface Y-cable:

NOTE

Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 9-1 are examples

only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the digital scanner are the same.

1.

Turn off the host and unplug the keyboard connector.

2.

Attach the modular connector of the Y-cable to the cable interface port on the digital scanner. See

Installing the

Interface Cable on page 1-3 .

3.

Connect the round male DIN host connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard port on the host device.

4.

Connect the round female DIN keyboard connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard connector.

5.

If needed, attach the optional power supply to the connector in the middle of the Y-cable.

6.

Ensure that all connections are secure.

7.

Turn on the host system.

8.

Select the Keyboard Wedge host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from Keyboard Wedge Host

Types on page 9-4 .

9.

To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.

Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 - 3

Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults

Table 9-1 lists the defaults for Keyboard Wedge host parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar

code(s) in the Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters section beginning on page

9-4

.

NOTE See

Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters

for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 9-1 Keyboard Wedge Host Default Table

Parameter Default

Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters

Keyboard Wedge Host Type IBM PC/AT& IBM PC Compatibles

Country Types (Country Codes)

Ignore Unknown Characters

North American

Transmit

Keystroke Delay

Intra-Keystroke Delay

Alternate Numeric Keypad

Emulation

No Delay

Disable

Disable

Caps Lock On

Caps Lock Override

Convert Wedge Data

Function Key Mapping

FN1 Substitution

Send and Make Break

Disable

Disable

No Convert

Disable

Disable

Send

9-9

9-9

9-10

9-10

9-11

9-11

9-4

9-5

9-7

9-7

9-8

9-8

Page

Number

9 - 4 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters

Keyboard Wedge Host Types

Select the Keyboard Wedge host by scanning one of the bar codes below.

IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles

IBM AT Notebook

Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 - 5

Keyboard Wedge Country Types - Country Codes

Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type. If your keyboard type does not appear, see

Alternate

Numeric Keypad Emulation on page 9-8 .

*

North American

German Windows

French Windows

French Canadian Windows 95/98

French Canadian Windows XP/2000

French Belgian Windows

9 - 6 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Keyboard Wedge Country Types - Country Codes (continued)

Spanish Windows

Italian Windows

Swedish Windows

UK English Windows

Japanese Windows

Portuguese-Brazilian Windows

Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 - 7

Ignore Unknown Characters

Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. Select Send Bar Codes With Unknown

Characters to send all bar code data except for unknown characters. The digital scanner issues no error beeps.

Select Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters to send bar code data up to the first unknown character. The digital scanner issues an error beep.

*

Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters

(Transmit)

Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters

Keystroke Delay

This is the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes. Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when hosts require a slower transmission of data.

*

No Delay

Medium Delay (20 msec)

Long Delay (40 msec)

9 - 8 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Intra-Keystroke Delay

Enable this to insert an additional delay between each emulated key depression and release. This sets the

Keystroke Delay parameter to a minimum of 5 msec as well.

Enable

*

Disable

Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation

This allows emulation of most other country keyboard types not listed in

Keyboard Wedge Country Types - Country

Codes on page 9-5 in a Microsoft

®

operating system environment.

Enable Alternate Numeric Keypad

*

Disable Alternate Numeric Keypad

Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 - 9

Caps Lock On

Enable this to emulate keystrokes as if the Caps Lock key is always pressed.

Enable Caps Lock On

*

Disable Caps Lock On

Caps Lock Override

If you enable this, on AT or AT Notebook hosts, the scanner ignores the state of the Caps Lock key. Therefore, an

‘A’ in the bar code transmits as an ‘A’ regardless of the state of the keyboard’s Caps Lock key.

Enable Caps Lock Override

*

Disable Caps Lock Override

NOTE If both Caps Lock On and Caps Lock Override are enabled, Caps Lock Override takes precedence.

9 - 10 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Convert Wedge Data

Enable this to convert all bar code data to the selected case.

Convert to Upper Case

Convert to Lower Case

*

No Convert

Function Key Mapping

ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control key sequences (see

Table 9-2 on page 9-13

). Enable this parameter to send the keys in bold in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not you enable this parameter.

Enable

*

Disable

Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 - 11

FN1 Substitution

Enable this to replace FN1 characters in an EAN128 bar code with a user-selected keystroke (see FN1

Substitution on page 9-11 ).

Enable

Send Make and Break

Enable this to prevent sending the scan codes for releasing a key.

*

Disable

*Send Make and Break Scan Codes

Send Make Scan Code Only

NOTE Windows-based systems must use Send Make and Break Scan Codes .

9 - 12 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Keyboard Maps

Refer to the following keyboard maps for prefix/suffix keystroke parameters. To program the prefix/suffix values,

see the bar codes on page 4-49 .

7014 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 7010 7007

7006

7001

7009

7008 7011 7012 7003

7002 7004 7005

7015

7017 7016 7018

Figure 9-2 IBM PS2 Type Keyboard

Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 - 13

ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge

NOTE Code 39 Full ASCII interprets the bar code special character ($ + % /) preceding a Code 39 character and assigns an ASCII character value to the pair. For example, if you enable Code 39 Full ASCII and scan +B , it transmits as b , %J as ?

, and %V as @ . Scanning ABC%I outputs the keystroke equivalent of ABC >.

Table 9-2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set

ASCII Value

Full ASCII Code 39

Encode Char.acter

1001

1002

$A

$B

CTRL A

CTRL B

1003

1004

1005

1006

1007

1008

$C

$D

$E

$F

$G

$H

CTRL C

CTRL D

CTRL E

CTRL F

CTRL G

Keystroke

CTRL H/ BACKSPACE

1

1009 $I

1010

1011

1012

1013

$J

$K

$L

$M

CTRL I/ HORIZONTAL TAB

1

CTRL J

CTRL K

CTRL L

CTRL M/ ENTER

1

1014

1015

1016

1017

1018

1019

1020

1021

$N

$O

$P

$Q

$R

$S

$T

$U

CTRL N

CTRL O

CTRL P

CTRL Q

CTRL R

CTRL S

CTRL T

CTRL U

1022 $V CTRL V

1023 $W CTRL W

1

The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled

Function Key Mapping on page 9-10 . Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke transmits.

9 - 14 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

1028

1029

1030

1031

1032

1033

1034

1035

Table 9-2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued)

ASCII Value

Full ASCII Code 39

Encode Char.acter

Keystroke

1024

1025

$X

$Y

CTRL X

CTRL Y

1026

1027

$Z

%A

CTRL Z

CTRL [ / ESC

1

%B

%C

%D

%E

Space

/A

/B

/C

!

CTRL \

CTRL ]

CTRL 6

CTRL -

Space

#

1036

1037

1038

1039

1040

1041

1042

1043

/H

/I

/J

/K

/D

/E

/F

/G

*

+

(

)

&

$

%

1044

1045

1046

1047

/L

-

.

/O /

.

,

-

1048

1049

0

1

0

1

1050 2 2

1051 3 3

1

The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 9-10 . Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke transmits.

Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 - 15

1058

1059

1060

1061

1062

1063

1064

1065

Table 9-2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued)

ASCII Value

Full ASCII Code 39

Encode Char.acter

Keystroke

1052

1053

4

5

4

5

1054

1055

1056

1057

6

7

8

9

6

7

8

9

/Z

%F

%G

%H

%I

%J

%V

A

;

:

<

=

>

?

@

A

1066

1067

1068

1069

1070

1071

1072

1073 I

H

F

G

D

E

B

C

I

H

F

G

D

E

B

C

1074

1075

1076

1077

J

K

L

M

J

K

L

M

1078 N N

1079 O O

1

The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 9-10 . Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke transmits.

9 - 16 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

1086

1087

1088

1089

1090

1091

1092

1093

Table 9-2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued)

ASCII Value

Full ASCII Code 39

Encode Char.acter

Keystroke

1080

1081

P

Q

P

Q

1082

1083

1084

1085

R

S

T

U

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

%K

%L

%M

\

[

]

V

W

X

Y

Z

1094

1095

1096

1097

1098

1099

1100

1101

+B

+C

+D

+E

%N

%O

%W

+A d e b c

‘ a

^

_

1102

1103

1104

1105

+F

+G

+H

+I f i g h

1106 +J j

1107 +K k

1

The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 9-10 . Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke transmits.

Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 - 17

1118

1119

1120

1121

1114

1115

1116

1117

Table 9-2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued)

ASCII Value

Full ASCII Code 39

Encode Char.acter

Keystroke

1108

1109

+L

+M l m

1110

1111

1112

1113

+N

+O

+P

+Q n o p q

+R

+S

+T

+U

+V

+W

+X

+Y t r s u v w x y

1122

1123

1124

1125

+Z

%P

%Q

%R

| z

{

}

1126 %S ~

1

The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 9-10 . Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke transmits.

Table 9-3 Keyboard Wedge ALT Key Character Set

ALT Keys Keystroke

2065

2066

ALT A

ALT B

2067

2068

2069

2070

2071

ALT C

ALT D

ALT E

ALT F

ALT G

9 - 18 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

2078

2079

2080

2081

2082

2083

2084

2085

2086

2087

2088

2089

2090

Table 9-3 Keyboard Wedge ALT Key Character Set (Continued)

ALT Keys Keystroke

2072

2073

ALT H

ALT I

2074

2075

2076

2077

ALT J

ALT K

ALT L

ALT M

ALT N

ALT O

ALT P

ALT Q

ALT R

ALT S

ALT T

ALT U

ALT V

ALT W

ALT X

ALT Y

ALT Z

Table 9-4 Keyboard Wedge GUI Key Character Set

GUI Keys Keystrokes

3000

3048

Right Control Key

GUI 0

3049

3050

3051

3052

GUI 1

GUI 2

GUI 3

GUI 4

3053

3054

3055

GUI 5

GUI 6

GUI 7

3085

3086

3087

3088

3089

3090

3077

3078

3079

3080

3081

3082

3083

3084

3069

3070

3071

3072

3073

3074

3075

3076

Table 9-4 Keyboard Wedge GUI Key Character Set (Continued)

GUI Keys Keystrokes

3056

3057

GUI 8

GUI 9

3065

3066

3067

3068

GUI A

GUI B

GUI C

GUI D

GUI E

GUI F

GUI G

GUI H

GUI I

GUI J

GUI K

GUI L

GUI M

GUI N

GUI O

GUI P

GUI Q

GUI R

GUI S

GUI T

GUI U

GUI V

GUI W

GUI X

GUI Y

GUI Z

Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 - 19

9 - 20 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

5015

5016

5017

5018

5019

5020

5021

5022

5023

5024

5007

5008

5009

5010

5011

5012

5013

5014

Table 9-5 Keyboard Wedge F Key Character Set

F Keys Keystroke

5001

5002

F1

F2

5003

5004

5005

5006

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

F11

F12

F13

F14

F19

F20

F21

F22

F15

F16

F17

F18

F23

F24

Table 9-6 Keyboard Wedge Numeric Keypad Character Set

Numeric Keypad Keystroke

6042

6043

*

+

6044

6045 undefined

-

6052

6053

6054

6055

6056

6057

6058

6059

Table 9-6 Keyboard Wedge Numeric Keypad Character Set (Continued)

Numeric Keypad Keystroke

6046

6047

.

/

6048

6049

6050

6051

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Enter

Num Lock

7007

7008

7009

7010

7011

7012

7013

7014

Table 9-7 Keyboard Wedge Extended Keypad Character Set

Extended Keypad Keystroke

7001

7002

Break

Delete

7003

7004

7005

7006

Pg Up

End

Pg Dn

Pause

Scroll Lock

Backspace

Tab

Print Screen

Insert

Home

Enter

Escape

Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 - 21

9 - 22 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Table 9-7 Keyboard Wedge Extended Keypad Character Set (Continued)

Extended Keypad Keystroke

7015

7016

Up Arrow

Dn Arrow

7017

7018

Left Arrow

Right Arrow

Chapter 10 Symbologies

Introduction

This chapter describes symbology features and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features.

Before programming, follow the instructions in Chapter 1, Getting Started

.

To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the digital scanner powers down.

NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.

Select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host.

To return all features to default values, scan the Set Default Parameter on page 4-5

. Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (

*

) indicate default values.

*

Indicates Default

*

Enable UPC-A

(1)

Feature/Option

Option Value

Scanning Sequence Examples

In most cases, scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to transmit bar code data without the

UPC-A check digit, simply scan the Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit bar code under

Transmit UPC-A Check

Digit on page 10-14

. The digital scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.

Other parameters, such as Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 require scanning several bar codes. See the individual parameter, such as Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 , for this procedure.

10 - 2 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Errors While Scanning

Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.

Symbology Parameter Defaults

Table 10-1 lists the defaults for all symbologies parameters. To change the default values, scan the appropriate bar

codes in this guide. These new values replace the standard default values in memory. To recall the default parameter values, scan the

Set Default Parameter on page 4-5 .

NOTE See

Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters

for all user preferences, hosts, and miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 10-1 Parameter Defaults

Parameter

UPC/EAN

UPC-A

UPC-E

UPC-E1

EAN-8/JAN 8

EAN-13/JAN 13

Bookland EAN

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (2 and 5 digits)

User-Programmable Supplementals

Supplemental 1:

Supplemental 2:

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM ID

Transmit UPC-A Check Digit

Transmit UPC-E Check Digit

Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit

UPC-A Preamble

UPC-E Preamble

UPC-E1 Preamble

Convert UPC-E to A

Parameter

Number

35

36

37

40

41

42

34

579

580

80

672

3

83

16

1

2

12

4

Default

Enable

Enable

Disable

Enable

Enable

Disable

Ignore

10

Combined

Enable

Enable

Enable

System Character

System Character

System Character

Disable

10-13

10-14

10-14

10-14

10-15

10-16

10-16

10-18

10-19

Page

Number

10-7

10-7

10-8

10-8

10-9

10-9

10-11

10-13

Symbologies 10 - 3

Table 10-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Convert UPC-E1 to A

EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend

Bookland ISBN Format

UCC Coupon Extended Code

Coupon Report

ISSN EAN

Code 128

Code 128

Set Length(s) for Code 128

GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128)

ISBT 128

ISBT Concatenation

Check ISBT Table

ISBT Concatenation Redundancy

Code 39

Code 39

Trioptic Code 39

Convert Code 39 to Code 32 (Italian Pharmacy Code)

Code 32 Prefix

Set Length(s) for Code 39

Code 39 Check Digit Verification

Transmit Code 39 Check Digit

Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion

Buffer Code 39

Code 93

Code 93

Set Length(s) for Code 93

0

13

86

231

18, 19

48

43

17

113

9

26, 27

Parameter

Number

38

39

Default

Disable

Disable

576

85

730

617

ISBN-10

Disable

New Coupon

Symbols

Disable

8

209, 210

14

84

577

578

223

Enable

Any Length

Enable

Enable

Disable

Enable

10

Enable

Disable

Disable

Disable

2 to 55

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

4 to 55

10-30

10-30

10-31

10-31

10-32

10-33

10-33

10-34

10-34

10-25

10-25

10-26

10-27

10-28

10-29

10-29

10-37

10-37

Page

Number

10-19

10-20

10-21

10-22

10-23

10-24

10 - 4 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Table 10-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter

Code 11

Code 11

Set Lengths for Code 11

Code 11 Check Digit Verification

Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s)

Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)

Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)

Set Lengths for I 2 of 5

I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification

Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit

Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13

Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)

Discrete 2 of 5

Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5

Codabar (NW - 7)

Codabar

Set Lengths for Codabar

CLSI Editing

NOTIS Editing

MSI

MSI

Set Length(s) for MSI

MSI Check Digits

Transmit MSI Check Digit

MSI Check Digit Algorithm

Chinese 2 of 5

Chinese 2 of 5

7

24, 25

54

55

11

30, 31

50

46

51

408

6

22, 23

49

44

82

5

20, 21

Parameter

Number

10

28, 29

52

47

Default

Disable

4 to 55

Disable

Disable

Disable

14

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

12

Disable

5 to 55

Disable

Disable

Disable

4 to 55

One

Disable

Mod 10/Mod 10

Disable

10-49

10-49

10-51

10-51

10-52

10-52

10-54

10-54

10-55

10-55

10-42

10-43

10-45

10-45

10-46

10-46

10-47

Page

Number

10-39

10-39

10-41

10-42

Symbologies 10 - 5

Table 10-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Matrix 2 of 5

Matrix 2 of 5

Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths

Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

Korean 3 of 5

Inverse 1D

Parameter

Postal Codes

US Postnet

US Planet

Transmit US Postal Check Digit

UK Postal

Transmit UK Postal Check Digit

Japan Postal

Australia Post

Australia Post Format

Netherlands KIX Code

USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail

UPU FICS Postal

GS1 DataBar

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14)

GS1 DataBar Limited

GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level

GS1 DataBar Expanded

Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN

Composite

Composite CC-C

Composite CC-A/B

338

339

728

340

397

96

290

291

718

89

90

95

91

326

592

611

341

342

Parameter

Number

618

619

620

622

623

581

586

Default

Disable

1 Length - 14

Disable

Disable

Disable

(SR) Regular

(DP) Inverse

Autodetect

Page

Number

10-56

10-57

10-58

10-58

10-59

10-60

Disable

Disable

Enable

Disable

Enable

Disable

Disable

Autodiscriminate

Disable

Disable

Disable

10-61

10-61

10-62

10-62

10-63

10-63

10-64

10-65

10-66

10-66

10-67

Enable

Disable

Level 3

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

10-68

10-68

10-69

10-70

10-70

10-71

10-71

10 - 6 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Table 10-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Composite TLC-39

UPC Composite Mode

Composite Beep Mode

Parameter

GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes

2D Symbologies

Parameter

Number

371

344

398

427

Default

Disable

Never Linked

Page

Number

10-72

10-72

Beep As Each Code

Type is Decoded

10-73

Disable

10-73

PDF417

MicroPDF417

Code 128 Emulation

Data Matrix

15

227

123

292

Enable

Disable

Disable

Enable

10-74

10-74

10-75

10-76

Data Matrix Inverse

Maxicode

QR Code

QR Inverse

MicroQR 573

Aztec 574

Aztec Inverse

Symbology-Specific Security Levels

589

588

294

293

587

Redundancy Level

Security Level

Intercharacter Gap Size

Report Version

Macro PDF

Flush Macro PDF Buffer

Abort Macro PDF Entry

78

77

381

Inverse Autodetect

Disable

Enable

Regular

Enable

Enable

Regular

1

0

Normal

10-77

10-78

10-78

10-79

10-79

10-80

10-80

10-81

10-83

10-84

10-84

10-85

10-85

UPC/EAN

Enable/Disable UPC-A

Parameter # 1

To enable or disable UPC-A, scan the appropriate bar code below .

*

Enable UPC-A

(1)

Enable/Disable UPC-E

Parameter # 2

To enable or disable UPC-E, scan the appropriate bar code below .

*

Enable UPC-E

(1)

Disable UPC-A

(0)

Disable UPC-E

(0)

Symbologies 10 - 7

10 - 8 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Enable/Disable UPC-E1

Parameter # 12

UPC-E1 is disabled by default.

To enable or disable UPC-E1, scan the appropriate bar code below.

NOTE UPC-E1 is not a UCC (Uniform Code Council) approved symbology.

Enable UPC-E1

(1)

Enable/Disable EAN-8/JAN-8

Parameter # 4

To enable or disable EAN-8/JAN-8, scan the appropriate bar code below .

*

Disable UPC-E1

(0)

*

Enable EAN-8/JAN-8

(1)

Disable EAN-8/JAN-8

(0)

Symbologies 10 - 9

Enable/Disable EAN-13/JAN-13

Parameter # 3

To enable or disable EAN-13/JAN-13, scan the appropriate bar code below .

*

Enable EAN-13/JAN-13

(1)

Disable EAN-13/JAN-13

(0)

Enable/Disable Bookland EAN

Parameter # 83

To enable or disable Bookland EAN, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Bookland EAN

(1)

*

Disable Bookland EAN

(0)

NOTE If you enable Bookland EAN, select a

Bookland ISBN Format on page 10-21

. Also select either Decode

UPC/EAN Supplementals, Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN Supplementals, or Enable 978/979 Supplemental

Mode in

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page 10-10 .

10 - 10 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals

Parameter # 16

Supplementals are bar codes appended according to specific format conventions (e.g., UPC A+2, UPC E+2, EAN

13+2). The following options are available:

• If you select Ignore UPC/EAN with Supplementals , and the digital scanner is presented with a

UPC/EAN plus supplemental symbol, the scanner decodes UPC/EAN and ignores the supplemental characters.

• If you select Decode UPC/EAN with Supplementals , the digital scanner only decodes UPC/EAN symbols with supplemental characters, and ignores symbols without supplementals.

• If you select Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN Supplementals , the digital scanner decodes UPC/EAN symbols with supplemental characters immediately. If the symbol does not have a supplemental, the digital scanner must decode the bar code the number of times set via

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page

10-13

before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no supplemental.

• If you select one of the following Supplemental Mode options, the digital scanner immediately transmits

EAN-13 bar codes starting with that prefix that have supplemental characters. If the symbol does not have a supplemental, the digital scanner must decode the bar code the number of times set via

UPC/EAN/JAN

Supplemental Redundancy on page 10-13 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no

supplemental. The digital scanner transmits UPC/EAN bar codes that do not have that prefix immediately.

• Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode

• Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode

NOTE If you select 978/979 Supplemental Mode and are scanning Bookland EAN bar codes, see

Enable/Disable Bookland EAN on page 10-9

to enable Bookland EAN, and select a format using

Bookland ISBN Format on page 10-21 .

• Enable 977 Supplemental Mode

• Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode

• Enable 491 Supplemental Mode

• Enable Smart Supplemental Mode - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed previously.

• Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with a 3-digit user-defined prefix. Set this 3-digit prefix using

User-Programmable Supplementals on page 10-13 .

• Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with either of

two 3-digit user-defined prefixes. Set the 3-digit prefixes using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 10-13

.

• Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any prefix

listed previously or the user-defined prefix set using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 10-13 .

• Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any

prefix listed previously or one of the two user-defined prefixes set using User-Programmable

Supplementals on page 10-13

.

NOTE To minimize the risk of invalid data transmission, select either to decode or ignore supplemental characters.

Symbologies 10 - 11

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Only With Supplementals

(1)

*

Ignore Supplementals

(0)

Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals

(2)

Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode

(4)

Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode

(5)

Enable 977 Supplemental Mode

(7)

10 - 12 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)

Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode

(6)

Enable 491 Supplemental Mode

(8)

Enable Smart Supplemental Mode

(3)

Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1

(9)

Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2

(10)

Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2

(12)

Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1

(11)

Symbologies 10 - 13

User-Programmable Supplementals

Supplemental 1: Parameter # 579

Supplemental 2: Parameter # 580

If you selected a Supplemental User-Programmable option from Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page

10-10

, select User-Programmable Supplemental 1 to set the 3-digit prefix. Then select the 3 digits using the

numeric bar codes beginning on page D-1

. Select User-Programmable Supplemental 2 to set a second 3-digit

prefix. Then select the 3 digits using the numeric bar codes beginning on page D-1

.

User-Programmable Supplemental 1

User-Programmable Supplemental 2

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy

Parameter # 80

If you selected Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals , this option adjusts the number of times to decode a symbol without supplementals before transmission. The range is from two to thirty times. Five or above is recommended when decoding a mix of UPC/EAN/JAN symbols with and without supplementals. The default is 10.

Scan the bar code below to set a decode redundancy value. Next, scan two numeric bar codes in Appendix D,

Numeric Bar Codes . Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error or change a selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2

.

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy

10 - 14 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format

Parameter # 672

Select an output format when reporting UPC/EAN/JAN bar codes with supplementals with AIM ID enabled:

• Separate - UPC/EAN with supplementals transmit as ]E<0 or 4><data>]E<1 or 2>[supp data]

• Combined - EAN-8 with supplementals transmit as ]E4<data>]E<1 or 2>[supp data]

All other UPC/EAN with supplementals transmit as ]E3<data+supps>

Separate

(0)

*

Combined

(1)

Transmit UPC-A Check Digit

Parameter # 40

The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-A check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data.

*

Transmit UPC-A Check Digit

(1)

Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit

(0)

Symbologies 10 - 15

Transmit UPC-E Check Digit

Parameter # 41

The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-E check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data.

*

Transmit UPC-E Check Digit

(1)

Do Not Transmit UPC-E Check Digit

(0)

Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit

Parameter # 42

The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-E1 check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data.

*

Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit

(1)

Do Not Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit

(0)

10 - 16 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

UPC-A Preamble

Parameter # 34

Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. There are three options for transmitting a UPC-A preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit

System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA), and transmit no preamble. Select the appropriate option to match the host system.

No Preamble (<DATA>)

(0)

*

System Character (<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)

(1)

System Character & Country Code

(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)

(2)

Symbologies 10 - 17

UPC-E Preamble

Parameter # 35

Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. There are three options for transmitting a UPC-E preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit

System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA), and transmit no preamble. Select the appropriate option to match the host system.

No Preamble (<DATA>)

(0)

*

System Character (<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)

(1)

System Character & Country Code

(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)

(2)

10 - 18 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

UPC-E1 Preamble

Parameter # 36

Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. There are three options for transmitting a UPC-E1 preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit

System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA), and transmit no preamble. Select the appropriate option to match the host system.

No Preamble (<DATA>)

(0)

*

System Character (<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)

(1)

System Character & Country Code

(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)

(2)

Symbologies 10 - 19

Convert UPC-E to UPC-A

Parameter # 37

Enable this to convert UPC-E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble,

Check Digit).

Disable this to transmit UPC-E decoded data as UPC-E data, without conversion.

Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Enable)

(1)

*

Do Not Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Disable)

(0)

Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A

Parameter # 38

Enable this to convert UPC-E1 decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).

Disable this to transmit UPC-E1 decoded data as UPC-E1 data, without conversion.

Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Enable)

(1)

*

Do Not Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Disable)

(0)

10 - 20 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend

Parameter # 39

Enable this parameter to add five leading zeros to decoded EAN-8 symbols to make them compatible in format to

EAN-13 symbols.

Disable this to transmit EAN-8 symbols as is.

Enable EAN/JAN Zero Extend

(1)

*

Disable EAN/JAN Zero Extend

(0)

Symbologies 10 - 21

Bookland ISBN Format

Parameter # 576

If you enabled Bookland EAN using Enable/Disable Bookland EAN on page 10-9 , select one of the following

formats for Bookland data:

• Bookland ISBN-10 - The digital scanner reports Bookland data starting with 978 in traditional 10-digit format with the special Bookland check digit for backward-compatibility. Data starting with 979 is not considered

Bookland in this mode.

• Bookland ISBN-13 - The digital scanner reports Bookland data (starting with either 978 or 979) as EAN-13 in

13-digit format to meet the 2007 ISBN-13 protocol.

*Bookland ISBN-10

(0)

Bookland ISBN-13

(1)

NOTE For Bookland EAN to function properly, first enable Bookland EAN using

Enable/Disable Bookland EAN on page 10-9 , then select either Decode UPC/EAN Supplementals, Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN

Supplementals, or Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode in

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page 10-10

.

10 - 22 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

UCC Coupon Extended Code

Parameter # 85

Enable this parameter to decode UPC-A bar codes starting with digit ‘5’, EAN-13 bar codes starting with digit ‘99’, and UPC-A/GS1-128 Coupon Codes. UPCA, EAN-13, and GS1-128 must be enabled to scan all types of

Coupon Codes.

*

Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code

(1)

*

Disable UCC Coupon Extended Code

(0)

NOTE See

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 10-13

to control autodiscrimination of the

GS1-128 (right half) of a coupon code.

Symbologies 10 - 23

Coupon Report

Parameter # 730

Traditional coupon symbols (old coupon symbols) are composed of two bar codes: UPC/EAN and Code128. A new coupon symbol is composed of a single Databar Expanded bar code. The new coupon format offers more options for purchase values (up to $999.99) and supports complex discount offers such as a second purchase requirement.

An interim coupon symbol also exists that contains both types of bar codes: UPC/EAN and Databar Expanded.

This format accommodates both retailers that do not recognize or use the additional information included in the new coupon symbol, as well as those who can process new coupon symbols.

Scan a bar code below to select one of the following options for decoding coupon symbols:

• Old Coupon Symbols - Scanning an old coupon symbol reports both UPC and Code 128, scanning an interim coupon symbol reports UPC, and scanning a new coupon symbol reports nothing (no decode).

• New Coupon Symbols - Scanning an old coupon symbol reports either UPC or Code 128, and scanning an interim coupon symbol or a new coupon symbol reports Databar Expanded.

• Both Coupon Formats - Scanning an old coupon symbol reports both UPC and Code 128, and scanning an interim coupon symbol or a new coupon symbol reports Databar Expanded.

Old Coupon Symbols

(0)

*

New Coupon Symbols

(1)

Both Coupon Formats

(2)

10 - 24 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

ISSN EAN

Parameter # 617

To enable or disable ISSN EAN, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable ISSN EAN

(1)

*

Disable ISSN EAN

(0)

Symbologies 10 - 25

Code 128

Enable/Disable Code 128

Parameter # 8

To enable or disable Code 128, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*

Enable Code 128

(1)

Disable Code 128

(0)

Set Lengths for Code 128

Parameter # L1 = 209, L2 = 210

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 128 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.

NOTE When setting lengths for different bar code types, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.

• One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 128 symbols containing a selected length.

Select the length using the numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes . For example, to decode

only Code 128 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 128 - One Discrete Length , then scan 1 followed by

4 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2

.

• Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 128 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes

. For example, to decode only Code 128 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 128 - Two

Discrete Lengths , then scan 0 , 2 , 1 , and then 4 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2

.

• Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 128 symbol with a specific length range.

Select lengths using numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes .

For example, to decode

Code 128 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 128 - Length Within Range .

Then scan 0 , 4 , 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the

selection, scan Cancel on page D-2 .

• Any Length - Select this option to decode Code 128 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner’s capability.

10 - 26 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Set Lengths for Code 128 (continued)

Code 128 - One Discrete Length

Code 128 - Two Discrete Lengths

Code 128 - Length Within Range

*Code 128 - Any Length

Enable/Disable GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128)

Parameter # 14

To enable or disable GS1-128, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*

Enable GS1-128

(1)

Disable GS1-128

(0)

Symbologies 10 - 27

Enable/Disable ISBT 128

Parameter # 84

ISBT 128 is a variant of Code 128 used in the blood bank industry. Scan a bar code below to enable or disable

ISBT 128. If necessary, the host must perform concatenation of the ISBT data.

*

Enable ISBT 128

(1)

Disable ISBT 128

(0)

10 - 28 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

ISBT Concatenation

Parameter # 577

Select an option for concatenating pairs of ISBT code types:

• If you select Disable ISBT Concatenation , the digital scanner does not concatenate pairs of ISBT codes it encounters.

• If you select Enable ISBT Concatenation , there must be two ISBT codes in order for the digital scanner to decode and perform concatenation. The digital scanner does not decode single ISBT symbols.

• If you select Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation , the digital scanner decodes and concatenates pairs of ISBT codes immediately. If only a single ISBT symbol is present, the digital scanner must decode the symbol the number of times set via

ISBT Concatenation Redundancy on page 10-29

before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no additional ISBT symbol.

*

Disable ISBT Concatenation

(0)

Enable ISBT Concatenation

(1)

Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation

(2)

Symbologies 10 - 29

Check ISBT Table

Parameter # 578

The ISBT specification includes a table that lists several types of ISBT bar codes that are commonly used in pairs.

If you set ISBT Concatenation to Enable , enable Check ISBT Table to concatenate only those pairs found in this table. Other types of ISBT codes are not concatenated.

*

Enable Check ISBT Table

(1)

Disable Check ISBT Table

(0)

ISBT Concatenation Redundancy

Parameter # 223

If you set ISBT Concatenation to Autodiscriminate, use this parameter to set the number of times the digital scanner must decode an ISBT symbol before determining that there is no additional symbol.

Scan the bar code below, then scan two numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes

to set a value between 2 and 20. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error or change a selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2

. The default is 10.

ISBT Concatenation Redundancy

10 - 30 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Code 39

Enable/Disable Code 39

Parameter # 0

To enable or disable Code 39, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*

Enable Code 39

(1)

Disable Code 39

(0)

Enable/Disable Trioptic Code 39

Parameter # 13

Trioptic Code 39 is a variant of Code 39 used in the marking of computer tape cartridges. Trioptic Code 39 symbols always contain six characters. To enable or disable Trioptic Code 39, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Trioptic Code 39

(1)

*

Disable Trioptic Code 39

(0)

NOTE You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously.

Symbologies 10 - 31

Convert Code 39 to Code 32

Parameter # 86

Code 32 is a variant of Code 39 used by the Italian pharmaceutical industry. Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable converting Code 39 to Code 32.

NOTE Code 39 must be enabled for this parameter to function.

Enable Convert Code 39 to Code 32

(1)

*

Disable Convert Code 39 to Code 32

(0)

Code 32 Prefix

Parameter # 231

Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable adding the prefix character “A” to all Code 32 bar codes.

NOTE Convert Code 39 to Code 32 must be enabled for this parameter to function.

Enable Code 32 Prefix

(1)

*

Disable Code 32 Prefix

(0)

10 - 32 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Set Lengths for Code 39

Parameter # L1 = 18, L2 = 19

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 39 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. If Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled, Length Within a Range or Any Length are the preferred options.

NOTE When setting lengths for different bar code types, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.

• One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing a selected length.

Select the length using the numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes . For example, to decode

only Code 39 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 39 - One Discrete Length , then scan 1 followed by 4 .

To correct an error or change the selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2

.

• Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes

. For example, to decode only Code 39 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 39 - Two

Discrete Lengths , then scan 0 , 2 , 1 , and then 4 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2

.

• Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 39 symbol with a specific length range.

Select lengths using numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes .

For example, to decode

Code 39 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 39 - Length Within Range .

Then scan 0 , 4 , 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the

selection, scan Cancel on page D-2 .

• Any Length - Select this option to decode Code 39 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner’s capability.

Code 39 - One Discrete Length

Code 39 - Two Discrete Lengths

Code 39 - Length Within Range

Code 39 - Any Length

Symbologies 10 - 33

Code 39 Check Digit Verification

Parameter # 48

Enable this feature to check the integrity of all Code 39 symbols to verify that the data complies with specified check digit algorithm. Only Code 39 symbols which include a modulo 43 check digit are decoded. Enable this feature if the Code 39 symbols contain a Modulo 43 check digit.

Enable Code 39 Check Digit

(1)

*

Disable Code 39 Check Digit

(0)

Transmit Code 39 Check Digit

Parameter # 43

Scan a bar code below to transmit Code 39 data with or without the check digit.

Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Enable)

(1)

*

Do Not Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Disable)

(0)

NOTE Code 39 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.

10 - 34 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion

Parameter # 17

Code 39 Full ASCII is a variant of Code 39 which pairs characters to encode the full ASCII character set. To enable or disable Code 39 Full ASCII, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Code 39 Full ASCII

(1)

*

Disable Code 39 Full ASCII

(0)

NOTE You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously.

Code 39 Full ASCII to Full ASCII Correlation is host-dependent, and is therefore described in the ASCII

Character Set Table for the appropriate interface. See the

ASCII Character Set for USB on page 6-16

or

the ASCII Character Set for RS-232 on page 7-19 .

Code 39 Buffering - Scan & Store

Parameter # 113

This feature allows the digital scanner to accumulate data from multiple Code 39 symbols.

Selecting the Scan and Store option (Buffer Code 39) temporarily buffers all Code 39 symbols having a leading space as a first character for later transmission. The leading space is not buffered.

Decoding a Code 39 symbol with no leading space transmits in sequence all buffered data in a first-in first-out format, plus the “triggering” symbol. See the following pages for further details.

Select Do Not Buffer Code 39 to transmit all decoded Code 39 symbols immediately without storing them in the buffer.

Symbologies 10 - 35

Code 39 Buffering - Scan & Store (continued)

This feature affects Code 39 only. If selecting Buffer Code 39 , we recommend configuring the digital scanner to decode Code 39 symbology only.

Buffer Code 39 (Enable)

(1)

*

Do Not Buffer Code 39 (Disable)

(0)

While there is data in the transmission buffer, you cannot select Do Not Buffer Code 39 . The buffer holds 200 bytes of information.

To disable Code 39 buffering when there is data in the transmission buffer, first force the buffer transmission (see

Transmit Buffer on page 10-36

) or clear the buffer.

Buffer Data

To buffer data, enable Code 39 buffering and scan a Code 39 symbol with a space immediately following the start pattern.

• Unless the data overflows the transmission buffer, the digital scanner issues a low/high beep to indicate successful decode and buffering. (For overflow conditions, see

Overfilling Transmission Buffer on page

10-36

.)

• The digital scanner adds the decoded data excluding the leading space to the transmission buffer.

• No transmission occurs.

Clear Transmission Buffer

To clear the transmission buffer, scan the Clear Buffer bar code below, which contains only a start character, a dash (minus), and a stop character.

• The digital scanner issues a short high/low/high beep.

• The digital scanner erases the transmission buffer.

• No transmission occurs.

Clear Buffer

NOTE The Clear Buffer contains only the dash (minus) character. In order to scan this command, set Code 39 lengths to include length 1.

10 - 36 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Transmit Buffer

There are two methods to transmit the Code 39 buffer.

1.

Scan the Transmit Buffer bar code below, which includes only a start character, a plus (+), and a stop character.

2.

The digital scanner transmits and clears the buffer.

• The digital scanner issues a low/high beep.

Transmit Buffer

3.

Scan a Code 39 bar code with a leading character other than a space.

• The digital scanner appends new decode data to buffered data.

• The digital scanner transmits and clears the buffer.

• The digital scanner signals that it transmitted the buffer with a low/high beep.

• The digital scanner transmits and clears the buffer.

NOTE The Transmit Buffer contains only a plus (+) character. In order to scan this command, set Code 39 lengths to include length 1.

Overfilling Transmission Buffer

The Code 39 buffer holds 200 characters. If the symbol just read overflows the transmission buffer:

• The digital scanner indicates that it rejected the symbol by issuing three long, high beeps.

• No transmission occurs. The data in the buffer is not affected.

Attempt to Transmit an Empty Buffer

If you scan the Transmit Buffer symbol and the Code 39 buffer is empty:

• A short low/high/low beep signals that the buffer is empty.

• No transmission occurs.

• The buffer remains empty.

Symbologies 10 - 37

Code 93

Enable/Disable Code 93

Parameter # 9

To enable or disable Code 93, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Code 93

(1)

*

Disable Code 93

(0)

Set Lengths for Code 93

Parameter # L1 = 26, L2 = 27

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 93 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.

• One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing a selected length.

Select the length using the numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes . For example, to decode

only Code 93 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 93 - One Discrete Length , then scan 1 followed by 4 .

To correct an error or to change the selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2 .

• Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes

. For example, to decode only Code 93 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 93 - Two

Discrete Lengths , then scan 0 , 2 , 1 , and then 4 . To correct an error or to change the selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2

.

• Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 93 symbol with a specific length range.

Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes

. For example, to decode

Code 93 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 93 - Length Within Range .

Then scan 0 , 4 , 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the

selection, scan Cancel on page D-2 .

• Any Length - Scan this option to decode Code 93 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner’s capability.

10 - 38 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Set Lengths for Code 93 (continued)

Code 93 - One Discrete Length

Code 93 - Length Within Range

Code 93 - Two Discrete Lengths

Code 93 - Any Length

Symbologies 10 - 39

Code 11

Code 11

Parameter # 10

To enable or disable Code 11, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Code 11

(1)

*

Disable Code 11

(0)

Set Lengths for Code 11

Parameter # L1 = 28, L2 = 29

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 11 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.

• One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing a selected length.

Select the length using the numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes . For example, to decode

only Code 11 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 11 - One Discrete Length , then scan 1 followed by 4 .

To correct an error or to change the selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2 .

• Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes

. For example, to decode only Code 11 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 11 - Two

Discrete Lengths , then scan 0 , 2 , 1 , and then 4 . To correct an error or to change the selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2

.

• Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 11 symbol with a specific length range.

Select lengths using numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes .

For example, to decode

Code 11 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 11 - Length Within Range .

Then scan 0 , 4 , 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the

selection, scan Cancel on page D-2 .

• Any Length - Scan this option to decode Code 11 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner’s capability.

10 - 40 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Set Lengths for Code 11 (continued)

Code 11 - One Discrete Length

Code 11 - Length Within Range

Code 11 - Two Discrete Lengths

Code 11 - Any Length

Symbologies 10 - 41

Code 11 Check Digit Verification

Parameter # 52

This feature allows the digital scanner to check the integrity of all Code 11 symbols to verify that the data complies with the specified check digit algorithm. This selects the check digit mechanism for the decoded Code 11 bar code.

The options are to check for one check digit, check for two check digits, or disable the feature.

To enable this feature, scan the bar code below corresponding to the number of check digits encoded in the Code

11 symbols.

*

Disable

(0)

One Check Digit

(1)

Two Check Digits

(2)

10 - 42 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Transmit Code 11 Check Digits

Parameter # 47

This feature selects whether or not to transmit the Code 11 check digit(s).

Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Enable)

(1)

*

Do Not Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Disable)

(0)

NOTE Code 11 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.

Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)

Enable/Disable Interleaved 2 of 5

Parameter # 6

To enable or disable Interleaved 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below, and select an Interleaved 2 of 5 length from the following pages.

Enable Interleaved 2 of 5

(1)

*Disable Interleaved 2 of 5

(0)

Symbologies 10 - 43

Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5

Parameter # L1 = 22, L2 = 23

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for I 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. The range for Interleaved 2 of 5 lengths is 0 - 55.

• One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes . For example, to decode only I 2

of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length , then scan 1 followed by 4 . To correct an error or to change the selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2 .

• Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes

. For example, to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete

Lengths , then scan 0 , 2 , 1 , and then 4 . To correct an error or to change the selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2 .

• Length Within Range - Select this option to decode an I 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range.

Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes .

For example, to decode I 2 of

5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range . Then scan 0 ,

4 , 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2

.

• Any Length - Scan this option to decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner’s capability.

NOTE Due to the construction of the I 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent this, select specific lengths (I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for I 2 of 5 applications.

10 - 44 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 (continued)

I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length

I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths

I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range

I 2 of 5 - Any Length

Symbologies 10 - 45

I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification

Parameter # 49

Enable this feature to check the integrity of all I 2 of 5 symbols to verify the data complies with either the specified

Uniform Symbology Specification (USS), or the Optical Product Code Council (OPCC) check digit algorithm.

*

Disable

(0)

USS Check Digit

(1)

OPCC Check Digit

(2)

Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit

Parameter # 44

Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit I 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit.

Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Enable)

(1)

*

Do Not Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Disable)

(0)

10 - 46 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13

Parameter # 82

Enable this parameter to convert 14-character I 2 of 5 codes to EAN-13, and transmit to the host as EAN-13. To accomplish this, the I 2 of 5 code must be enabled, and the code must have a leading zero and a valid EAN-13 check digit.

Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Enable)

(1)

*

Do Not Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Disable)

(0)

Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)

Enable/Disable Discrete 2 of 5

Parameter # 5

To enable or disable Discrete 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Discrete 2 of 5

(1)

*

Disable Discrete 2 of 5

(0)

Symbologies 10 - 47

Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5

Parameter # L1 = 20, L2 = 21

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for D 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. The range for Discrete 2 of 5 lengths is 0 - 55.

• One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length.

Select the length using the numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes . For example, to decode

only D 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length , then scan 1 followed by 4 .

To correct an error or to change the selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2 .

• Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes

. For example, to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select D 2 of 5 - Two

Discrete Lengths , then scan 0 , 2 , 1 , and then 4 . To correct an error or to change the selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2

.

• Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a D 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range.

Select lengths using numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes .

For example, to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range . Then scan 0 , 4 , 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the

selection, scan Cancel on page D-2 .

• Any Length - Scan this option to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner’s capability.

NOTE Due to the construction of the D 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent this, select specific lengths ( D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths ) for D 2 of 5 applications.

10 - 48 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 (continued)

D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length

D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths

D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range

D 2 of 5 - Any Length

Symbologies 10 - 49

Codabar (NW - 7)

Enable/Disable Codabar

Parameter # 7

To enable or disable Codabar, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Codabar

(1)

*

Disable Codabar

(0)

Set Lengths for Codabar

Parameter # L1 = 24, L2 = 25

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Codabar to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.

• One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing a selected length.

Select the length using the numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes . For example, to decode

only Codabar symbols with 14 characters, scan Codabar - One Discrete Length , then scan 1 followed by 4 .

To correct an error or to change the selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2 .

• Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes

. For example, to decode only Codabar symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Codabar - Two

Discrete Lengths , then scan 0 , 2 , 1 , and then 4 . To correct an error or to change the selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2

.

• Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Codabar symbol with a specific length range.

Select lengths using numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes .

For example, to decode

Codabar symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Codabar - Length Within Range .

Then scan 0 , 4 , 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the

selection, scan Cancel on page D-2 .

• Any Length - Scan this option to decode Codabar symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner’s capability.

10 - 50 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Set Lengths for Codabar (continued)

Codabar - One Discrete Length

Codabar - Length Within Range

Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths

Codabar - Any Length

Symbologies 10 - 51

CLSI Editing

Parameter # 54

Enable this parameter to strip the start and stop characters and insert a space after the first, fifth, and tenth characters of a 14-character Codabar symbol. Enable this feature if the host system requires this data format.

NOTE Symbol length does not include start and stop characters.

Enable CLSI Editing

(1)

*

Disable CLSI Editing

(0)

NOTIS Editing

Parameter # 55

Enable this parameter to strip the start and stop characters from a decoded Codabar symbol. Enable this feature if the host system requires this data format.

Enable NOTIS Editing

(1)

*

Disable NOTIS Editing

(0)

10 - 52 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

MSI

Enable/Disable MSI

Parameter # 11

To enable or disable MSI, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable MSI

(1)

*

Disable MSI

(0)

Set Lengths for MSI

Parameter # L1 = 30, L2 = 31

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for MSI to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.

• One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes

. For example, to decode only MSI symbols with 14 characters, scan MSI - One Discrete Length , then scan 1 followed by 4 . To correct an error or to change the selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2

.

• Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes . For example, to

decode only MSI symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select MSI - Two Discrete Lengths , then scan 0 , 2 , 1 , and then 4 . To correct an error or to change the selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2 .

• Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a MSI symbol with a specific length range. Select

lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes .

For example, to decode MSI symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan MSI - Length Within Range . Then scan 0 , 4 ,

1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2

.

• Any Length - Scan this option to decode MSI symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner’s capability.

Symbologies 10 - 53

Set Lengths for MSI (continued)

NOTE Due to the construction of the MSI symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent this, select specific lengths ( MSI - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths ) for MSI applications.

MSI - One Discrete Length

MSI - Two Discrete Lengths

MSI - Length Within Range

MSI - Any Length

10 - 54 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

MSI Check Digits

Parameter # 50

With MSI symbols, one check digit is mandatory and always verified by the reader. The second check digit is optional. If the MSI codes include two check digits, scan the Two MSI Check Digits bar code to enable verification of the second check digit.

See

MSI Check Digit Algorithm on page 10-55

for the selection of second digit algorithms.

*

One MSI Check Digit

(0)

Two MSI Check Digits

(1)

Transmit MSI Check Digit(s)

Parameter # 46

Scan a bar code below to transmit MSI data with or without the check digit.

Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Enable)

(1)

*

Do Not Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Disable)

(0)

Symbologies 10 - 55

MSI Check Digit Algorithm

Parameter # 51

Two algorithms are possible for the verification of the second MSI check digit. Select the bar code below corresponding to the algorithm used to encode the check digit.

MOD 10/MOD 11

(0)

Chinese 2 of 5

Enable/Disable Chinese 2 of 5

Parameter # 408

To enable or disable Chinese 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*

MOD 10/MOD 10

(1)

Enable Chinese 2 of 5

(1)

*

Disable Chinese 2 of 5

(0)

10 - 56 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Matrix 2 of 5

Enable/Disable Matrix 2 of 5

Parameter # 618

To enable or disable Matrix 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Matrix 2 of 5

(1)

*

Disable Matrix 2 of 5

(0)

Symbologies 10 - 57

Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5

Parameter # L1 = 619, L2 = 620

The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.

• One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length.

Select the length using the numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes . For example, to decode

only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan Matrix 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length , then scan 1 followed by 4 . To correct an error or to change the selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2

.

• Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes

. For example, to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Matrix 2 of 5 -

Two Discrete Lengths , then scan 0 , 2 , 1 , and then 4 . To correct an error or to change the selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2

.

• Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Matrix 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in

Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes

. For example, to decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Matrix 2 of 5 - Length

Within Range . Then scan 0 , 4 , 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the selection, scan

Cancel on page D-2 .

• Any Length - Scan this option to decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner’s capability.

*

Matrix 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length

Matrix 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths

Matrix 2 of 5 - Length Within Range

Matrix 2 of 5 - Any Length

10 - 58 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

Parameter # 622

The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the Matrix 2 of 5 check digit.

Enable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

(1)

*

Disable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

(0)

Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

Parameter # 623

Scan a bar code below to transmit Matrix 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit.

Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

(1)

*

Do Not Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

(0)

Symbologies 10 - 59

Korean 3 of 5

Enable/Disable Korean 3 of 5

Parameter # 581

To enable or disable Korean 3 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below.

NOTE The length for Korean 3 of 5 is fixed at 6.

Enable Korean 3 of 5

(1)

*

Disable Korean 3 of 5

(0)

10 - 60 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Inverse 1D

Parameter # 586

This parameter sets the 1D inverse decoder setting. Options are:

• Regular Only - the digital scanner decodes regular 1D bar codes only.

• Inverse Only - the digital scanner decodes inverse 1D bar codes only.

• Inverse Autodetect - the digital scanner decodes both regular and inverse 1D bar codes.

*Regular

(0)

Inverse Only

(1)

**Inverse Autodetect

(2)

NOTE *For the SR configuration, the Inverse 1D setting default is Regular .

**For the DP configuration, the Inverse 1D setting default is Inverse Autodetect .

Postal Codes

US Postnet

Parameter # 89

To enable or disable US Postnet, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable US Postnet

(1)

US Planet

Parameter # 90

To enable or disable US Planet, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*

Disable US Postnet

(0)

Symbologies 10 - 61

Enable US Planet

(1)

*

Disable US Planet

(0)

10 - 62 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Transmit US Postal Check Digit

Parameter # 95

Select whether to transmit US Postal data, which includes both US Postnet and US Planet, with or without the check digit.

*

Transmit US Postal Check Digit

(1)

Do Not Transmit US Postal Check Digit

(0)

UK Postal

Parameter # 91

To enable or disable UK Postal, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable UK Postal

(1)

*

Disable UK Postal

(0)

Symbologies 10 - 63

Transmit UK Postal Check Digit

Parameter # 96

Select whether to transmit UK Postal data with or without the check digit.

*

Transmit UK Postal

Check Digit

(1)

Do Not Transmit UK Postal Check Digit

(0)

Japan Postal

Parameter # 290

To enable or disable Japan Postal, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Japan Postal

(1)

*

Disable Japan Postal

(0)

10 - 64 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Australia Post

Parameter # 291

To enable or disable Australia Post, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Australia Post

(1)

*

Disable Australia Post

(0)

Symbologies 10 - 65

Australia Post Format

Parameter # 718

To select one of the following formats for Australia Post, scan the appropriate bar code below:

• Autodiscriminate (or Smart mode) - Attempt to decode the Customer Information Field using the N and C

Encoding Tables.

NOTE This option increases the risk of misdecodes because the encoded data format does not specify the

Encoding Table used for encoding.

• Raw Format - Output raw bar patterns as a series of numbers 0 through 3.

• Alphanumeric Encoding - Decode the Customer Information Field using the C Encoding Table.

• Numeric Encoding - Decode the Customer Information Field using the N Encoding Table.

For more information on Australia Post Encoding Tables, refer to the Australia Post Customer Barcoding Technical

Specifications available at http://www.auspost.com.au

.

*

Autodiscriminate

(0)

Raw Format

(1)

Alphanumeric Encoding

(2)

Numeric Encoding

(3)

10 - 66 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Netherlands KIX Code

Parameter # 326

To enable or disable Netherlands KIX Code, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Netherlands KIX Code

(1)

*

Disable Netherlands KIX Code

(0)

USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail

Parameter # 592

To enable or disable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail

(1)

*

Disable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail

(0)

Symbologies 10 - 67

UPU FICS Postal

Parameter # 611

To enable or disable UPU FICS Postal, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable UPU FICS Postal

(1)

*

Disable UPU FICS Postal

(0)

10 - 68 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

GS1 DataBar

The variants of GS1 DataBar are DataBar-14, DataBar Expanded, and DataBar Limited. The limited and expanded versions have stacked variants. Scan the appropriate bar codes to enable or disable each variant of GS1 DataBar.

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14)

Parameter # 338

*

Enable GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional

(1)

Disable GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional

(0)

GS1 DataBar Limited

Parameter # 339

Enable GS1 DataBar Limited

(1)

*

Disable GS1 DataBar Limited

(0)

Symbologies 10 - 69

GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level

Parameter # 728

The digital scanner offers four levels of decode security for GS1 DataBar Limited bar codes. There is an inverse relationship between security and digital scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security may result in reduced aggressiveness in scanning, so choose only that level of security necessary.

• Level 1 – No clear margin required. This complies with the original GS1 standard, yet might result in erroneous decoding of the DataBar Limited bar code when scanning some UPC symbols that start with digits

“9” and “7”

• Level 2 – Automatic risk detection. This level of security may result in erroneous decoding of DataBar Limited bar codes when scanning some UPC symbols. The scanner defaults to Level 3, otherwise to Level 1.

• Level 3 – Security level reflects newly proposed GS1 standard that requires a 5 times trailing clear margin.

• Level 4 – Security level extends beyond the standard required by GS1. This level of security requires a 5 times leading and trailing clear margin.

GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level 1

(1)

GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level 2

(2)

*GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level 3

(3)

GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level 4

(4)

10 - 70 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

GS1 DataBar Expanded

Parameter # 340

Enable GS1 DataBar Expanded

(1)

*

Disable GS1 DataBar Expanded

(0)

Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN

Parameter # 397

This parameter only applies to GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional and GS1 DataBar Limited symbols not decoded as part of a Composite symbol. Enable this to strip the leading '010' from DataBar-14 and DataBar Limited symbols encoding a single zero as the first digit, and report the bar code as EAN-13.

For bar codes beginning with two or more zeros but not six zeros, this parameter strips the leading '0100' and reports the bar code as UPC-A. The UPC-A Preamble parameter that transmits the system character and country code applies to converted bar codes. Note that neither the system character nor the check digit can be stripped.

Enable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN

(1)

*

Disable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN

(0)

Composite

Composite CC-C

Parameter # 341

Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type CC-C.

Enable CC-C

(1)

*

Disable CC-C

(0)

Composite CC-A/B

Parameter # 342

Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type CC-A/B.

Symbologies 10 - 71

Enable CC-A/B

(1)

*

Disable CC-A/B

(0)

10 - 72 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Composite TLC-39

Parameter # 371

Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type TLC-39.

Enable TLC39

(1)

*

Disable TLC39

(0)

UPC Composite Mode

Parameter # 344

Select an option for linking UPC symbols with a 2D symbol during transmission as if they were one symbol:

• Select UPC Never Linked to transmit UPC bar codes regardless of whether a 2D symbol is detected.

• Select UPC Always Linked to transmit UPC bar codes and the 2D portion.

If 2D is not present, the UPC bar code does not transmit.

• If you select Autodiscriminate UPC Composites , the digital scanner determines if there is a 2D portion, then transmits the UPC, as well as the 2D portion if present.

*

UPC Never Linked

(0)

UPC Always Linked

(1)

Autodiscriminate UPC Composites

(2)

Symbologies 10 - 73

Composite Beep Mode

Parameter # 398

To select the number of decode beeps when a composite bar code is decoded, scan the appropriate bar code.

Single Beep after both are decoded

(0)

*

Beep as each code type is decoded

(1)

Double Beep after both are decoded

(2)

GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes

Parameter # 427

Select whether to enable or disable this mode.

Enable GS1-128 Emulation Mode for

UCC/EAN Composite Codes

(1)

*

Disable GS1-128 Emulation Mode for

UCC/EAN Composite Codes

(0)

10 - 74 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

2D Symbologies

Enable/Disable PDF417

Parameter # 15

To enable or disable PDF417, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*

Enable PDF417

(1)

Enable/Disable MicroPDF417

Parameter # 227

To enable or disable MicroPDF417, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Disable PDF417

(0)

Enable MicroPDF417

(1)

*

Disable MicroPDF417

(0)

Symbologies 10 - 75

Code 128 Emulation

Parameter # 123

Enable this parameter to transmit data from certain MicroPDF417 symbols as Code 128.

AIM Code ID Character

(1) on page 4-48 must be enabled for this parameter to work.

Enable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes:

]C1

]C2

]C0 if the first codeword is 903-905 if the first codeword is 908 or 909 if the first codeword is 910 or 911

Disable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes:

]L3

]L4

]L5 if the first codeword is 903-905 if the first codeword is 908 or 909 if the first codeword is 910 or 911

Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Code 128 Emulation.

NOTE Linked MicroPDF codewords 906, 907, 912, 914, and 915 are not supported. Use GS1 Composites instead.

Enable Code 128 Emulation

(1)

*

Disable Code 128 Emulation

(0)

10 - 76 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Data Matrix

Parameter # 292

To enable or disable Data Matrix, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*

Enable Data Matrix

(1)

Disable Data Matrix

(0)

Symbologies 10 - 77

Data Matrix Inverse

Parameter # 588

This parameter sets the Data Matrix inverse decoder setting. Options are:

• Regular Only - the digital scanner decodes regular Data Matrix bar codes only.

• Inverse Only - the digital scanner decodes inverse Data Matrix bar codes only.

• Inverse Autodetect - the digital scanner decodes both regular and inverse Data Matrix bar codes.

*Regular

(0)

Inverse Only

(1)

**Inverse Autodetect

(2)

NOTE *For the SR configuration, the default is Regular . **If DPM Scanning is enabled, the scanner behaves as if the Data Matrix Inverse Autodetect setting is selected. When you disable DPM Scanning, the previous

(user-selected) Data Matrix Inverse setting remains in effect.

10 - 78 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Maxicode

Parameter # 294

To enable or disable Maxicode, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Maxicode

(1)

QR Code

Parameter # 293

To enable or disable QR Code, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*

Disable Maxicode

(0)

*

Enable QR Code

(1)

Disable QR Code

(0)

Symbologies 10 - 79

QR Inverse

Parameter # 587

This parameter sets the QR inverse decoder setting. Options are:

• Regular Only - the digital scanner decodes regular QR bar codes only.

• Inverse Only - the digital scanner decodes inverse QR bar codes only.

• Inverse Autodetect - the digital scanner decodes both regular and inverse QR bar codes.

*Regular

(0)

Inverse Only

(1)

Inverse Autodetect

(2)

MicroQR

Parameter # 573

To enable or disable MicroQR, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*

Enable MicroQR

(1)

Disable MicroQR

(0)

10 - 80 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Aztec

Parameter # 574

To enable or disable Aztec, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*

Enable Aztec

(1)

Disable Aztec

(0)

Aztec Inverse

Parameter # 589

This parameter sets the Aztec inverse decoder setting. Options are:

• Regular Only - the digital scanner decodes regular Aztec bar codes only.

• Inverse Only - the digital scanner decodes inverse Aztec bar codes only.

• Inverse Autodetect - the digital scanner decodes both regular and inverse Aztec bar codes.

*Regular

(0)

Inverse Only

(1)

Inverse Autodetect

(2)

Symbologies 10 - 81

Redundancy Level

Parameter # 78

The digital scanner offers four levels of decode redundancy. Select higher redundancy levels for decreasing levels of bar code quality. As redundancy levels increase, the digital scanner’s aggressiveness decreases.

Select the redundancy level appropriate for the bar code quality.

Redundancy Level 1

The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded:

Table 10-2 Redundancy Level 1 Codes

Code Type Code Length

Codabar

MSI

D 2 of 5

I 2 of 5

8 characters or less

4 characters or less

8 characters or less

8 characters or less

Redundancy Level 2

The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded:

Table 10-3 Redundancy Level 2 Codes

Code Type Code Length

All All

Redundancy Level 3

Code types other than the following must be successfully read twice before being decoded. The following codes must be read three times:

Table 10-4 Redundancy Level 3 Codes

Code Type Code Length

MSI

D 2 of 5

I 2 of 5

Codabar

4 characters or less

8 characters or less

8 characters or less

8 characters or less

10 - 82 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Redundancy Level 4

The following code types must be successfully read three times before being decoded:

Table 10-5 Redundancy Level 4 Codes

Code Type Code Length

All All

*

Redundancy Level 1

(1)

Redundancy Level 2

(2)

Redundancy Level 3

(3)

Redundancy Level 4

(4)

Symbologies 10 - 83

Security Level

Parameter # 77

The digital scanner offers four levels of decode security for delta bar codes, which include the Code 128 family,

UPC/EAN, and Code 93. Select increasing levels of security for decreasing levels of bar code quality. There is an inverse relationship between security and digital scanner aggressiveness, so choose only that level of security necessary for any given application.

• Security Level 0: This setting allows the digital scanner to operate in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient security in decoding most “in-spec” bar codes.

• Security Level 1: This default setting eliminates most misdecodes.

• Security Level 2: Select this option if Security level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.

• Security Level 3: If you selected Security Level 2 and misdecodes still occur, select this security level. Be advised, selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out of spec bar codes.

Selecting this level of security significantly impairs the decoding ability of the digital scanner. If you need this level of security, try to improve the quality of the bar codes.

*

Security Level 0

(0)

Security Level 1

(1)

Security Level 2

(2)

Security Level 3

(3)

10 - 84 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Intercharacter Gap Size

Parameter # 381

The Code 39 and Codabar symbologies have an intercharacter gap that is typically quite small. Due to various bar code-printing technologies, this gap can grow larger than the maximum size allowed, preventing the digital scanner from decoding the symbol. If this problem occurs, scan the Large Intercharacter Gaps parameter to tolerate these out-of-specification bar codes.

*

Normal Intercharacter Gaps

(6)

Large Intercharacter Gaps

(10)

Report Version

Scan the bar code below to report the version of software installed in the digital scanner.

Report Software Version

Symbologies 10 - 85

Macro PDF Features

Macro PDF is a special feature for concatenating multiple PDF symbols into one file. The scanner can decode symbols that are encoded with this feature, and can store more than 64 Kb of decoded data stored in up to 50

MacroPDF symbols.

CAUTION When printing, keep each Macro PDF sequence separate, as each sequence has unique identifiers.

Do not mix bar codes from several Macro PDF sequences, even if they encode the same data. When scanning Macro PDF sequences, scan the entire Macro PDF sequence without interruption. If, when scanning a mixed sequence, the digital scanner emits two long low beeps (Low/Low) this indicates an inconsistent file ID or inconsistent symbology error.

Flush Macro Buffer

This flushes the buffer of all decoded Macro PDF data stored to that point, transmits it to the host device, and aborts from Macro PDF mode.

Flush Macro PDF Buffer

Abort Macro PDF Entry

This clears all currently-stored Macro PDF data in the buffer without transmission and aborts from Macro PDF mode.

Abort Macro PDF Entry

10 - 86 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Chapter 11 123Scan2

Introduction

123Scan² is an easy to use, PC-based software tool that enables rapid customized setup of Zebra scanners.

123Scan² uses a wizard tool to guide users through a streamlined set up process. Settings are saved in a configuration file that can be distributed via e-mail, electronically downloaded via a USB cable, or used to generate a sheet of scannable programming bar codes.

Additionally 123Scan² can upgrade scanner firmware, check online to enable support for newly released products, generate a collection of multi-setting bar codes if the number of settings is very large, stage a large number of scanners simultaneously, generate reports with asset tracking information, and create custom products .

Communication with 123Scan

2

To communicate with the 123Scan² program which runs on a host computer running a Windows XP SP2 or

Windows 7 operating system, use a USB cable to connect the scanner to the host computer.

11 - 2 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

123Scan

2

Requirements

• Host computer with Windows XP SP2 or Windows 7

• Scanner

• USB cable.

For more information on123Scan², go to: http://www.zebra.com/123Scan2

For a 1 minute tour of 123Scan², go to: http://www.zebra.com/scannersoftwarevideos

To download 123Scan² software and access the Help file integrated in the utility, go to: http:/www.zebra.com/123Scan2

Scanner SDK, Other Software Tools, and Videos

Tackle all your scanner programming needs with our diversified set of software tools. Whether you need to simply stage a device, or develop a fully featured application with image and data capture as well as asset management, these tools help you every step of the way. To download any of the free tools listed below, go to: www.zebra.com/scannersoftwarevideos.

• 123Scan2 configuration utility (described in this chapter)

• Scanner SDK for Windows

• How-to videos

• Virtual COM port driver

• OPOS driver

• JPOS driver

• Scanner user documentation.

Chapter 12 Advanced Data Formatting

Introduction

Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) is a means of customizing data before transmission to the host device. Use ADF to edit scan data to suit requirements. Implement ADF by scanning a related series of bar codes which program the digital scanner with ADF rules.

For information and programming bar codes for ADF, refer to the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide , p/n 72E-69680-xx.

12 - 2 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Appendix A Standard Default Parameters

Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table

Parameter

Parameter

Number

Default

Page

Number

User Preferences

Set Default Parameter

Parameter Bar Code Scanning

Decode Pager Motor Enable

Decode Pager Motor Duration

Trigger Mode

Beep After Good Decode

Beeper Tone

Beeper Volume

Beeper Duration

Suppress Power-up Beeps

Hands-Free Mode

Presentation Performance Mode

Time Delay to Presentation Idle Mode

Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode

Low Power Mode

Time Delay to Low Power Mode

N/A

236

613

626

138

56

140

145

628

721

630

650

663

662

128

146

Set Defaults

Enable

Enable

500 msec

Level (Standard)

Enable

Medium

High

Medium

Do Not Suppress

Enable

Standard

1 Minute

1 Hour

Disable

1 Hour

4-5

4-6

4-7

4-7

4-9

4-11

4-12

4-11

4-13

4-13

4-14

4-14

4-16

4-18

4-20

4-21

Fuzzy 1D Processing 514 Enable

4-23

1

User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.

A - 2 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)

Parameter

Parameter

Number

Picklist Mode

PDF Prioritization

PDF Prioritization Timeout

DPM Scanning

Continuous Bar Code Read

Decode Session Timeout

402

719

720

521

649

136

Default

Disabled Always

Disable

200 ms

Enable

Disable

9.9 Sec

0.5 Sec

0.2 Sec

Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol 137

Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols 144

Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern

Hands-Free Decode Aiming Pattern

Presentation Mode Field of View

Mobile Phone/Display Mode

Decoding Illumination

Torch Mode

306

590

609

716

298

747

748

422

677

661

717

722

Enable

Enable for PDF

Full

Disable

Enable

Enable

Enable

Auto-Ranging

Smart LED Mode

Focus Mode

Multicode Mode

Multicode Expression

Multicode Mode Concatenation

Multicode Concatenation Symbology

Miscellaneous Options

Transmit Code ID Character

Prefix Value

Suffix 1 Value

Suffix 2 Value

45

99, 105

98, 104

100, 106

Disable

1

Disable

Concatenate as PDF417

None

7013 <CR><LF>

7013 <CR><LF>

4-48

4-49

4-49

Scan Data Transmission Format

FN1 Substitution Values

235

103, 109

Data as is

Set

4-50

4-51

Transmit “No Read” Message 94 Disable

4-52

1

User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.

4-36

4-37

4-36

4-39

4-44

4-45

4-32

4-33

4-34

4-35

4-29

4-29

4-30

4-31

Page

Number

4-24

4-25

4-26

4-27

4-28

4-28

Standard Default Parameters A - 3

Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)

Parameter

Parameter

Number

UID Parsing

Imaging Preferences

740

Operational Modes

Image Capture Illumination

Gain / Exposure Priority for Snapshot Mode

Snapshot Mode Timeout

N/A

361

562

323

Snapshot Aiming Pattern

Image Cropping

Crop to Pixel Addresses

Image Size (Number of Pixels)

Image Brightness (Target White)

JPEG Image Options

JPEG Target File Size

JPEG Quality and Size Value

Image Enhancement

Image File Format Selection

Bits per Pixel (BPP)

Signature Capture

Signature Capture Image File Format

Selection

302

390

299

561

300

301

315

316

317

318

305

564

304

303

93

313

Disable

N/A

Enable

Autodetect

Default

0 (30 seconds)

Enable

Disable

0 top

0 left

479 bottom

751 right

Full

180

Quality

160 kB

65

Off (0)

JPEG

8 BPP

Disable

JPEG

Number

4-53

5-4

5-5

5-6

5-7

5-7

5-8

5-9

Page

Signature Capture Bits per Pixel (BPP)

Signature Capture Width

Signature Capture Height

Signature Capture JPEG Quality

314

366

367

421

8 BPP

400

100

65

Video View Finder 324 Disable

5-20

Video View Finder Image Size 329 1700 bytes

5-20

1

User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.

5-18

5-19

5-19

5-19

5-12

5-13

5-14

5-15

5-10

5-11

5-11

5-12

5-16

5-17

A - 4 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)

Parameter

Parameter

Number

USB Host Parameters

USB Device Type N/A

N/A Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status

Handshaking

USB Country Keyboard Types

(Country Codes)

N/A

USB Keystroke Delay

USB CAPS Lock Override

USB Ignore Unknown Characters

Emulate Keypad

Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero

USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution

Function Key Mapping

Simulated Caps Lock

Convert Case

USB Static CDC

USB Polling Interval

Quick Keypad Emulation

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Default

HID Keyboard Emulation

Enable

North American

No Delay

Disable

Enable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

No Case Conversion

Enable

8 msec

Disable

6-4

6-5

Page

Number

6-6

RS-232 Host Parameters

RS-232 Host Types

Baud Rate

Parity Type

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Check Receive Errors

Hardware Handshaking

Software Handshaking

Host Serial Response Time-out

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Standard

9600

None

8-Bit

1 Stop Bit

Enable

None

None

2 Sec

1

7-6

7-8

7-9

7-9

7-10

7-10

7-11

7-13

7-15

RTS Line State N/A Low RTS

7-16

1

User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.

6-12

6-12

6-13

6-15

6-10

6-10

6-11

6-11

6-8

6-8

6-9

6-9

Standard Default Parameters A - 5

Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)

Parameter

Parameter

Number

Beep on <BEL>

Intercharacter Delay

N/A

N/A

Nixdorf Beep/LED Options

Ignore Unknown Characters

IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters

Port Address

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A Convert Unknown to Code 39

Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters

Keyboard Wedge Host Type N/A

Disable

0 msec

Default

Normal Operation

Send Bar Code

None Selected

Disable

8-4

8-5

Country Types (Country Codes)

Ignore Unknown Characters

Keystroke Delay

Intra-Keystroke Delay

Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation

Caps Lock On

Caps Lock Override

Convert Wedge Data

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

IBM PC/AT& IBM PC

Compatibles

1

North American

Transmit

No Delay

Disable

Disable

Disable

9-4

Function Key Mapping

FN1 Substitution

Send and Make Break

UPC/EAN

UPC-A

UPC-E

UPC-E1

EAN-8/JAN 8

N/A

N/A

N/A

1

2

12

4

Disable

No Convert

Disable

Disable

Send

Enable

Enable

Disable

Enable

9-10

9-11

9-11

EAN-13/JAN 13 3 Enable

10-9

Bookland EAN 83 Disable

10-9

1

User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.

10-7

10-7

10-8

10-8

9-8

9-9

9-9

9-10

9-5

9-7

9-7

9-8

Page

Number

7-16

7-17

7-18

7-18

A - 6 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)

Parameter

Parameter

Number

16 Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals

(2 and 5 digits)

User-Programmable Supplementals

Supplemental 1:

Supplemental 2:

579

580

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy

Transmit UPC-A Check Digit

Transmit UPC-E Check Digit

Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit

UPC-A Preamble

UPC-E Preamble

UPC-E1 Preamble

Convert UPC-E to A

Convert UPC-E1 to A

EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend

Bookland ISBN Format

UCC Coupon Extended Code

Coupon Report

ISSN EAN

Code 128

Code 128

Set Length(s) for Code 128

GS1-128

ISBT 128

80

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM ID 672

40

41

42

34

35

36

37

38

39

576

85

730

617

8

209, 210

14

84

Ignore

10

Combined

Enable

Enable

Enable

Default

System Character

System Character

System Character

Disable

Disable

Disable

ISBN-10

Disable

New Coupon Symbols

Disable

Enable

Any Length

Enable

Enable

Page

Number

10-10

10-13

10-13

10-14

10-14

10-15

10-15

10-16

10-17

10-18

10-19

10-19

10-22

10-21

10-22

10-23

10-24

10-25

10-25

10-26

10-27

ISBT Concatenation

Check ISBT Table

577

578

Disable

Enable

10-28

10-29

ISBT Concatenation Redundancy 223 10

10-29

1

User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.

Standard Default Parameters A - 7

Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)

Parameter

Parameter

Number

Code 39

Code 39 0

13 Trioptic Code 39

Convert Code 39 to Code 32

(Italian Pharmacy Code)

86

Code 32 Prefix

Set Length(s) for Code 39

Code 39 Check Digit Verification

Transmit Code 39 Check Digit

231

18, 19

48

43

Enable

Disable

Disable

Disable

2 to 55

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Default

Page

Number

10-30

10-30

10-31

Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion

Buffer Code 39

Code 93

Code 93

Set Length(s) for Code 93

Code 11

Code 11

Set Lengths for Code 11

17

113

9

26, 27

Disable

4 to 55

10-37

10-37

Code 11 Check Digit Verification

Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s)

Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)

Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)

Set Lengths for I 2 of 5

I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification

Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit

Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13

10

28, 29

52

47

6

22, 23

49

44

82

Disable

4 to 55

Disable

Disable

Disable

14

Disable

Disable

Disable

10-39

10-39

10-41

10-42

10-42

10-43

10-45

10-45

10-46

Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)

Discrete 2 of 5 5 Disable

10-46

Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 20, 21 12

10-47

1

User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.

10-31

10-32

10-33

10-33

10-34

10-34

A - 8 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)

Parameter

Parameter

Number

Codabar (NW - 7)

Codabar

Set Lengths for Codabar

CLSI Editing

NOTIS Editing

MSI

7

24, 25

54

55

MSI

Set Length(s) for MSI

MSI Check Digits

Transmit MSI Check Digit

11

30, 31

50

46

51 MSI Check Digit Algorithm

Chinese 2 of 5

Chinese 2 of 5

Matrix 2 of 5

408

Disable

5 to 55

Disable

Disable

Disable

4 to 55

One

Disable

Default

Mod 10/Mod 10

Disable

Page

Number

10-49

10-49

10-51

10-51

10-52

10-52

10-54

10-54

10-55

10-55

Matrix 2 of 5

Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths

Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

Korean 3 of 5

Inverse 1D

618

619

620

622

623

581

586

Disable

1 Length - 14

Disable

Disable

Disable

(SR) Regular

(DP) Inverse Autodetect

10-56

10-57

10-58

10-58

10-59

10-60

Postal Codes

US Postnet

US Planet

Transmit US Postal Check Digit

UK Postal

Transmit UK Postal Check Digit

89

90

95

91

96

Disable

Disable

Enable

Disable

Enable

10-61

10-61

10-62

10-62

10-63

Japan Postal 290 Disable

10-63

1

User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.

Standard Default Parameters A - 9

Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)

Parameter

Parameter

Number

Australia Post

Australia Post Format

291

718

Netherlands KIX Code

USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail

UPU FICS Postal

GS1 DataBar

326

592

611

Disable

Autodiscriminate

Disable

Disable

Disable

Default

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1

DataBar-14)

338

GS1 DataBar Limited

GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level

GS1 DataBar Expanded

Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN

339

728

340

397

Enable

Disable

Level 3

Disable

Disable

10-68

10-68

10-69

10-70

10-70

Composite

Composite CC-C

Composite CC-A/B

Composite TLC-39

UPC Composite Mode

Composite Beep Mode

341

342

371

344

398

Disable

Disable

Disable

Never Linked

Beep As Each Code Type is

Decoded

Disable GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN

Composite Codes

427

10-73

2D Symbologies

PDF417

MicroPDF417

Code 128 Emulation

Data Matrix

Data Matrix Inverse

15

227

123

292

588

Enable

Disable

Disable

Enable

(SR) Regular

(DPM) Inverse Autodetect

Disable

10-74

10-74

10-75

10-76

10-77

Maxicode 294

10-78

QR Code 293 Enable

10-78

1

User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.

10-71

10-71

10-72

10-72

10-73

Page

Number

10-64

10-65

10-66

10-66

10-67

A - 10 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)

Parameter

Parameter

Number

QR Inverse

MicroQR

587

573

Aztec

Aztec Inverse

Symbology-Specific Security Levels

Redundancy Level

574

589

Security Level

Intercharacter Gap Size

Report Version

Macro PDF

78

77

381

Regular

Enable

Enable

Regular

1

0

Normal

Default

10-81

10-83

10-84

10-84

Flush Macro PDF Buffer N/A N/A

10-85

Abort Macro PDF Entry N/A N/A

10-85

1

User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.

Page

Number

10-79

10-79

10-80

10-80

Appendix B Programming Reference

Symbol Code Identifiers

R

S

M

N

T

U

K

L

H

J

F

G

D

E

Table B-1 Symbol Code Characters

A

Code Character Code Type

UPC-A, UPC-E, UPC-E1, EAN-8, EAN-13

B

C

Code 39, Code 32

Codabar

Code 128, ISBT 128

Code 93

Interleaved 2 of 5

Discrete 2 of 5, or Discrete 2 of 5 IATA

Code 11

MSI

GS1-128

Bookland EAN

Trioptic Code 39

Coupon Code

GS1 DataBar Family

Matrix 2 of 5

UCC Composite, TLC 39

Chinese 2 of 5

B - 2 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

P04

P05

P06

P08

P09

P0A

P0B

Table B-1 Symbol Code Characters (Continued)

Code Character

X z

Code Type

ISSN, PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro PDF417

Aztec, Aztec Rune

P00

P01

P02

P03

Data Matrix

QR Code, MicroQR

Maxicode

US Postnet

US Planet

Japan Postal

UK Postal

Netherlands KIX Code

Australia Post

USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail

UPU FICS Postal

Programming Reference B - 3

AIM Code Identifiers

L

M

I

H

F

G

E e

U z

Q

S

X

Each AIM Code Identifier contains the three-character string ]cm where:

] = Flag Character (ASCII 93)

c = Code Character (see Table B-2 )

m = Modifier Character (see

Table B-3

)

Table B-2 Aim Code Characters

A

Code Character Code Type

Code 39, Code 39 Full ASCII, Code 32

C d

Code 128, ISBT 128, Coupon (Code 128 portion)

Data Matrix

UPC/EAN, Coupon (UPC portion)

GS1 DataBar Family

Codabar

Code 93

Code 11

Interleaved 2 of 5

PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro PDF417

MSI

QR Code, MicroQR

Discrete 2 of 5, IATA 2 of 5

Maxicode

Aztec, Aztec Rune

Bookland EAN, ISSN, Trioptic Code 39, Chinese 2 of 5, Matrix 2 of 5,

US Postnet, US Planet, UK Postal, Japan Postal, Australia Post,

Netherlands KIX Code, USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail,

UPU FICS Postal

B - 4 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

The modifier character is the sum of the applicable option values based on Table B-3 .

Table B-3 Modifier Characters

Code Type Option Value

Code 39 0

1

3

4

Option

No check character or Full ASCII processing.

Reader has checked one check character.

Reader has checked and stripped check character.

5

Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion.

Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked one check character.

7 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked and stripped check character.

Example: A Full ASCII bar code with check character W, A+I+MI+DW , is transmitted as

]A7 AIMID where 7 = (3+4).

Trioptic Code 39 0 No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0.

Example: A Trioptic bar code 412356 is transmitted as ]X0 412356

Code 128 0

1

Standard data packet, no Function code 1 in first symbol position.

Function code 1 in first symbol character position.

I 2 of 5

2 Function code 1 in second symbol character position.

Example: A Code (EAN) 128 bar code with Function 1 character

FNC1 position, AIMID is transmitted as

]

C1 AIMID

in the first

0 No check digit processing.

Codabar

Code 93

MSI

1

3

Reader has validated check digit.

Reader has validated and stripped check digit.

Example: An I 2 of 5 bar code without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]I0 4123

0 No check digit processing.

1

3

Reader has checked check digit.

Reader has stripped check digit before transmission.

Example: A Codabar bar code without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]F0 4123

0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.

Example: A Code 93 bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as ]G0 012345678905

0 Check digits are sent.

1 No check digit is sent.

Example: An MSI bar code 4123, with a single check digit checked, is transmitted as

]M1 4123

Programming Reference B - 5

Table B-3 Modifier Characters (Continued)

Code Type Option Value

D 2 of 5 0

Option

No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.

Example: A D 2 of 5 bar code 4123, is transmitted as ]S0 4123

UPC/EAN 0

1

2

3

Standard data packet in full EAN format, i.e. 13 digits for UPC-A,

UPC-E, and EAN-13 (not including supplemental data).

Two digit supplemental data only.

Five digit supplemental data only.

Combined data packet comprising 13 digits from EAN-13, UPC-A or UPC-E symbol and 2 or 5 digits from supplemental symbol.

Bookland EAN

Code 11

GS1 DataBar

Family

0

1

3

4 EAN-8 data packet.

Example: A UPC-A bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as ]E0 0012345678905

0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.

Example: A Bookland EAN bar code 123456789X is transmitted as ]X0 123456789X

Single check digit

Two check digits

Check characters validated but not transmitted.

No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0. GS1 DataBar

Omnidirectional and GS1 DataBar Limited transmit with an

Application Identifier “01”.

Note: In GS1-128 emulation mode, GS1 DataBar is transmitted using Code 128 rules (i.e., ]C1).

EAN.UCC

Composites

(GS1 DataBar,

GS1-128,

2D portion of

UPC composite)

0

1

Example: A GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional bar code 100123456788902 is transmitted as ]e 001100123456788902.

Native mode transmission.

Note: UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules.

Standard data packet.

Data packet containing the data following an encoded symbol separator character.

2

3

1

Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism character. The data packet does not support the ECI protocol.

Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism character. The data packet supports the ECI protocol.

GS1-128 emulation

Note: UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules.

Data packet is a GS1-128 symbol (i.e., data is preceded with ]JC1).

B - 6 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Table B-3 Modifier Characters (Continued)

Code Type Option Value

PDF417,

Micro PDF417

0

Option

Reader set to conform to protocol defined in 1994 PDF417 symbology specifications.

Note: When this option is transmitted, the receiver cannot reliably determine whether ECIs have been invoked or whether data byte 92

DEC transmission.

has been doubled in

1

2

3

4

Reader set to follow the ECI protocol (Extended Channel

Interpretation). All data characters 92

DEC

are doubled.

Reader set for Basic Channel operation (no escape character transmission protocol). Data characters 92

DEC

are not doubled.

Note: When decoders are set to this mode, unbuffered Macro symbols and symbols requiring the decoder to convey ECI escape sequences cannot be transmitted.

The bar code contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915.

The bar code contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword is in the range 908-909.

Data Matrix

MaxiCode

4

5

6

2

3

0

1

5 The bar code contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword is in the range 910-911.

Example: A PDF417 bar code ABCD, with no transmission protocol enabled, is transmitted as ]L2ABCD.

ECC 000-140, not supported.

ECC 200.

ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position.

ECC 200, FNC1 in second or sixth position.

0

1

2

3

ECC 200, ECI protocol implemented.

ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position, ECI protocol implemented.

ECC 200, FNC1 in second or sixth position, ECI protocol implemented.

Symbol in Mode 4 or 5.

Symbol in Mode 2 or 3.

Symbol in Mode 4 or 5, ECI protocol implemented.

Symbol in Mode 2 or 3, ECI protocol implemented in secondary message.

Programming Reference B - 7

Table B-3 Modifier Characters (Continued)

Code Type Option Value

QR Code 0

1

Option

Model 1 symbol.

Model 2 / MicroQR symbol, ECI protocol not implemented.

2

3

4

5

Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented.

Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in first position.

Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented, FNC1 implied in first position.

Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in second position.

Aztec

6

0

C

Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented, FNC1 implied in second position.

Aztec symbol.

Aztec Rune symbol.

B - 8 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Appendix C Sample Bar Codes

Code 39

123ABC

UPC/EAN

UPC-A, 100%

0

12345 67890

5

C - 2 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

EAN-13, 100%

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 0

Code 128

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4

Interleaved 2 of 5

12345678901231

Sample Bar Codes C - 3

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14)

NOTE

DataBar-14 must be enabled to read the bar code below (see GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1

DataBar-14) on page 10-68 ).

7612341562341

PDF417

Data Matrix

C - 4 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Maxicode

QR Code

US Postnet

UK Postal

Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes

Numeric Bar Codes

For parameters requiring specific numeric values, scan the appropriately numbered bar code(s).

0

1

2

3

4

D - 2 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Numeric Bar Codes (continued)

6

8

Cancel

To correct an error or change a selection, scan the bar code below.

Cancel

9

7

5

Appendix E ASCII Character Sets

Table E-1 ASCII Value Table

1000

1001

1002

1003

1004

1005

1006

1007

1008

1009

1010

1011

1012

1013

1014

1015

ASCII Value

Full ASCII Code 39

Encode Char

%U

$A

$B

$C

$D

$E

$F

$G

$H

$I

$J

$K

$L

$M

$N

$O

CTRL 2

CTRL A

CTRL B

CTRL C

CTRL D

CTRL E

CTRL F

CTRL G

Keystroke

CTRL H/ BACKSPACE

CTRL I/

CTRL J

CTRL K

CTRL L

CTRL M/ ENTER

CTRL N

CTRL O

1

1

HORIZONTAL TAB

1

The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping. Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.

E - 2 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Table E-1 ASCII Value Table (Continued)

ASCII Value

Full ASCII Code 39

Encode Char

1016

1017

1018

1019

1020

1021

$P

$Q

$R

$S

$T

$U

CTRL P

CTRL Q

CTRL R

CTRL S

CTRL T

CTRL U

CTRL V

CTRL W

Keystroke

1022

1023

1024

1025

1026

1027

1028

1029

$V

$W

$X

$Y

$Z

%A

%B

%C

CTRL X

CTRL Y

CTRL Z

CTRL [

CTRL \

CTRL ]

CTRL 6

CTRL -

1030

1031

1032

1033

1034

1035

1036

1037

1038

1039

1040

1041

%D

%E

Space

/A

/B

/C

/D

/E

/F

/G

/H

/I

&

$

%

#

!

Space

(

)

1042

1043

/J

/K

*

+

The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping. Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.

ASCII Character Sets E - 3

Table E-1 ASCII Value Table (Continued)

ASCII Value

Full ASCII Code 39

Encode Char

1044

1045

1046

1047

1048

1049

.

/L

-

/o

0

1

2

3

0

1

/

.

,

-

Keystroke

1050

1051

1052

1053

1054

1055

1056

1057

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

;

:

8

9

6

7

4

5

1058

1059

1060

1061

1062

1063

1064

1065

1066

1067

1068

1069

/Z

%F

%G

%H

%I

%J

%V

A

D

E

B

C

>

?

<

=

@

A

B

C

D

E

1070

1071

F

G

F

G

The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping. Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.

E - 4 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Table E-1 ASCII Value Table (Continued)

ASCII Value

Full ASCII Code 39

Encode Char

1072

1073

1074

1075

1076

1077

I

H

J

K

L

M

N

O

L

M

J

K

I

H

Keystroke

1078

1079

1080

1081

1082

1083

1084

1085

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

T

U

V

W

R

S

P

Q

1086

1087

1088

1089

1090

1091

1092

1093

1094

1095

1096

1097

V

W

X

Y

Z

%K

%L

%M

%N

%O

%W

+A

[

Z

X

Y

]

\

^

_ a

1098

1099

+B

+C b c

The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping. Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.

ASCII Character Sets E - 5

Table E-1 ASCII Value Table (Continued)

ASCII Value

Full ASCII Code 39

Encode Char

1100

1101

1102

1103

1104

1105

1106

1107

1108

1109

1110

1111

1112

1113

1114

1115

1116

1117

1118

1119

1120

1121

1122

1123

1124

1125

+D

+E

+F

+G

+H

+I

+J

+K

+L

+M

+N

+O

+P

+Q

+R

+S

+T

+U

+V

+W

+X

+Y

+Z

%P

%Q

%R f j d e g i h k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z

{

I

}

Keystroke

1126 %S ~

The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping. Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.

E - 6 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

2078

2079

2080

2081

2082

2083

2084

2085

2086

2087

2088

2089

2090

2070

2071

2072

2073

2074

2075

2076

2077

Table E-2 ALT Key Standard Default Tables

ALT Keys

2064

2065

ALT 2

ALT A

2066

2067

2068

2069

ALT B

ALT C

ALT D

ALT E

ALT F

ALT G

ALT H

ALT I

ALT J

ALT K

ALT L

ALT M

ALT N

ALT O

ALT P

ALT Q

ALT R

ALT S

ALT T

ALT U

ALT V

ALT W

ALT X

ALT Y

ALT Z

Keystroke

3054

3055

3056

3057

3065

3066

3067

3068

Table E-3 USB GUI Key Character Set

GUI Key

3000

Keystroke

Right Control Key

3048

3049

GUI 0

GUI 1

3050

3051

3052

3053

GUI 2

GUI 3

GUI 4

GUI 5

GUI 6

GUI 7

GUI 8

GUI 9

GUI A

GUI B

GUI C

GUI D

3069

3070

3071

3072

3073

3074

3075

3076

GUI E

GUI F

GUI G

GUI H

GUI I

GUI J

GUI K

GUI L

3077

3078

3079

3080

GUI M

GUI N

GUI O

GUI P

Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.

ASCII Character Sets E - 7

E - 8 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Table E-3 USB GUI Key Character Set (Continued)

GUI Key Keystroke

3081

3082

GUI Q

GUI R

3083

3084

3085

3086

GUI S

GUI T

GUI U

GUI V

3087

3088

3089

3090

GUI W

GUI X

GUI Y

GUI Z

Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.

4007

4008

4009

4010

4011

4012

4013

4014

4015

4016

Table E-4 PF Key Standard Default Table

PF Keys

4001

4002

PF 1

PF 2

4003

4004

4005

4006

PF 3

PF 4

PF 5

PF 6

PF 7

PF 8

PF 9

PF 10

PF 11

PF 12

PF 13

PF 14

PF 15

PF 16

Keystroke

ASCII Character Sets E - 9

E - 10 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

5015

5016

5017

5018

5019

5020

5021

5022

5023

5024

5007

5008

5009

5010

5011

5012

5013

5014

Table E-5 F key Standard Default Table

F Keys

5001

5002

F 1

F 2

5003

5004

5005

5006

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6

F 11

F 12

F 13

F 14

F 7

F 8

F 9

F 10

F 19

F 20

F 21

F 22

F 15

F 16

F 17

F 18

F 23

F 24

Keystroke

6048

6049

6050

6051

6052

6053

6054

6055

Table E-6 Numeric Key Standard Default Table

Numeric Keypad Keystroke

6042

6043

*

+

6044

6045

6046

6047

.

/

Undefined

-

6056

6057

6058

6059

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Enter

Num Lock

ASCII Character Sets E - 11

E - 12 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

7007

7008

7009

7010

7011

7012

7013

7014

Table E-7 Extended Keypad Standard Default Table

Extended Keypad Keystroke

7001

7002

Break

Delete

7003

7004

7005

7006

Pg Up

End

Pg Dn

Pause

7015

7016

7017

7018

Scroll Lock

Backspace

Tab

Print Screen

Insert

Home

Enter

Escape

Up Arrow

Dn Arrow

Left Arrow

Right Arrow

Appendix F Signature Capture Code

Introduction

CapCode, a signature capture code, is a special pattern that encloses a signature area on a document and allows a scanner to capture a signature.

There are several accepted patterns that allow automatic identification of different signatures on the same form.

For example, on the federal tax return 1040 form there are three signature areas, one each for two joint filers, and one for a professional preparer. By using different patterns, a program can correctly identify all three, so they can be captured in any sequence and still be identified correctly.

Code Structure

Signature Capture Area

A CapCode is printed as two identical patterns on either side of a signature capture box, as shown in

Figure F-1

.

Each pattern extends the full height of the signature capture box.

The box is optional, so you can omit it, replace it with a single baseline, or print a baseline with an "X" on top of it towards the left, as is customarily done in the US to indicate a request for signature. However, if an "X" or other markings are added in the signature box area, these are captured with the signature.

Figure F-1 CapCode

F - 2 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

CapCode Pattern Structure

A CapCode pattern structure consists of a start pattern followed by a separator space, a signature capture box, a second separator space, and then a stop pattern. Assuming that X is the dimension of the thinnest element, the start and stop patterns each contains 9X total width in 4 bars and 3 spaces. A 7X quiet zone is required to the left and to the right of the CapCode pattern.

Capture Box

Quiet

Zone

Start

Separator Spaces

Stop Quiet

Zone

Figure F-2 CapCode Structure

The separator spaces on either side of the signature capture box can be between 1X and 3X wide.

Start / Stop Patterns

2

2

1

1

3

Table F-1 lists the accepted start / stop patterns. The bar and space widths are expressed as multiples of X.

You must use the same pattern on either side of a signature capture box. The type value is reported with the captured signature to indicate the purpose of the signature captured.

Table F-1 Start / Stop Pattern Definitions

Bar/Space Patterns

B S B S B S B

Type

1

2

1

2

1

2

2

1

1

1

2

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

5

7

8

9

Signature Capture Code F - 3

Table F-2 lists selectable parameters used to generate the image of the captured signature.

Table F-2 User Defined CapCode Parameters

Parameter Defined

Width

Height

Format

JPEG quality

Bits Per Pixel

(not applicable to JPEG format)

Number of pixels

Number of pixels

JPEG, BMP, TIFF

1 (most compression) to 100 (best quality)

1 (2 levels)

4 (16 levels)

8 (256 levels)

BMP format does not use compression, JPEG and TIFF formats do.

Dimensions

The size of the signature capture box is determined by the height and separation of the start and stop patterns. The line width of the signature capture box is insignificant.

The thinnest element width, referred to here as X, is nominally 10 mils (1 mil = 0.0254 mm). Select this as an exact multiple of the pixel pitch of the printer used. For example, when using a 203 DPI (dots-per-inch) printer and printing 2 dots per module, the resulting X dimension is 9.85 mils.

Data Format

The scanner output is formatted according to

Table F-3

. Zebra scanners allow different user options to output or inhibit bar code type. Selecting "Symbol ID" as the bar code type for output identifies the CapCode with letter "i".

Table F-3 Data Format

File Format

(1 byte)

JPEG - 1

BMP - 3

TIFF - 4

See

Type (1 byte)

Table F-1

column

, last

Image Size

(4 bytes, BIG Endian)

(Same bytes as in a data file)

Image Data

F - 4 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Additional Capabilities

Regardless of how the signature is captured, the output signature image is de-skewed and right-side up.

A scanner that captures signatures automatically determines whether it is scanning a signature or a bar code.

You can disable the signature capturing capability in a scanner.

Signature Boxes

Figure F-3

illustrates the five acceptable signature boxes:

Type 2:

Type 5:

Type 7:

Type 8:

Type 9:

Figure F-3 Acceptable Signature Boxes

Glossary

A

Aperture. The opening in an optical system defined by a lens or baffle that establishes the field of view.

API. An interface by means of which one software component communicates with or controls another. Usually used to refer to services provided by one software component to another, usually via software interrupts or function calls

Application Programming Interface. See API .

ASCII. American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A 7 bit-plus-parity code representing 128 letters, numerals, punctuation marks and control characters. It is a standard data transmission code in the U.S.

Autodiscrimination. The ability of an interface controller to determine the code type of a scanned bar code. After this determination is made, the information content is decoded.

B

Bar. The dark element in a printed bar code symbol.

Bar Code. A pattern of variable-width bars and spaces which represents numeric or alphanumeric data in machine-readable form. The general format of a bar code symbol consists of a leading margin, start character, data or message character, check character (if any), stop character, and trailing margin. Within this framework, each recognizable symbology uses its own unique format. See Symbology .

Bar Code Density. The number of characters represented per unit of measurement (e.g., characters per inch).

Bar Height. The dimension of a bar measured perpendicular to the bar width.

Bar Width. Thickness of a bar measured from the edge closest to the symbol start character to the trailing edge of the same bar.

BIOS. Basic Input Output System. A collection of ROM-based code with a standard API used to interface with standard PC hardware.

Glossary - 2 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

Bit. Binary digit. One bit is the basic unit of binary information. Generally, eight consecutive bits compose one byte of data.

The pattern of 0 and 1 values within the byte determines its meaning.

Bits per Second (bps). Bits transmitted or received.

Boot or Boot-up. The process a computer goes through when it starts. During boot-up, the computer can run self-diagnostic tests and configure hardware and software.

BOOTP. A protocol for remote booting of diskless devices. Assigns an IP address to a machine and may specify a boot file.

The client sends a bootp request as a broadcast to the bootp server port (67) and the bootp server responds using the bootp client port (68). The bootp server must have a table of all devices, associated MAC addresses and IP addresses. bps. See Bits Per Second .

Byte. On an addressable boundary, eight adjacent binary digits (0 and 1) combined in a pattern to represent a specific character or numeric value. Bits are numbered from the right, 0 through 7, with bit 0 the low-order bit. One byte in memory is used to store one ASCII character.

C

CDRH. Center for Devices and Radiological Health. A federal agency responsible for regulating laser product safety. This agency specifies various laser operation classes based on power output during operation.

CDRH Class 1. This is the lowest power CDRH laser classification. This class is considered intrinsically safe, even if all laser output were directed into the eye's pupil. There are no special operating procedures for this class.

CDRH Class 2. No additional software mechanisms are needed to conform to this limit. Laser operation in this class poses no danger for unintentional direct human exposure.

Character. A pattern of bars and spaces which either directly represents data or indicates a control function, such as a number, letter, punctuation mark, or communications control contained in a message.

Character Set. Those characters available for encoding in a particular bar code symbology.

Check Digit. A digit used to verify a correct symbol decode. The scanner inserts the decoded data into an arithmetic formula and checks that the resulting number matches the encoded check digit. Check digits are required for UPC but are optional for other symbologies. Using check digits decreases the chance of substitution errors when a symbol is decoded.

Codabar. A discrete self-checking code with a character set consisting of digits 0 to 9 and six additional characters: ( - $ : /

, +).

Code 128. A high density symbology which allows the controller to encode all 128 ASCII characters without adding extra symbol elements.

Code 3 of 9 (Code 39). A versatile and widely used alphanumeric bar code symbology with a set of 43 character types, including all uppercase letters, numerals from 0 to 9 and 7 special characters (- . / + % $ and space). The code name is derived from the fact that 3 of 9 elements representing a character are wide, while the remaining 6 are narrow.

Code 93. An industrial symbology compatible with Code 39 but offering a full character ASCII set and a higher coding density than Code 39.

Glossary - 3

Code Length. Number of data characters in a bar code between the start and stop characters, not including those characters.

Cold Boot. A cold boot restarts the mobile computer and erases all user stored records and entries.

COM port. Communication port; ports are identified by number, e.g., COM1, COM2.

Continuous Code. A bar code or symbol in which all spaces within the symbol are parts of characters. There are no intercharacter gaps in a continuous code. The absence of gaps allows for greater information density.

Cradle. A cradle is used for charging the terminal battery and for communicating with a host computer, and provides a storage place for the terminal when not in use.

D

Dead Zone. An area within a scanner's field of view, in which specular reflection may prevent a successful decode.

Decode. To recognize a bar code symbology (e.g., UPC/EAN) and then analyze the content of the specific bar code scanned.

Decode Algorithm. A decoding scheme that converts pulse widths into data representation of the letters or numbers encoded within a bar code symbol.

Decryption. Decryption is the decoding and unscrambling of received encrypted data. Also see, Encryption and Key .

Depth of Field. The range between minimum and maximum distances at which a scanner can read a symbol with a certain minimum element width.

Discrete 2 of 5. A binary bar code symbology representing each character by a group of five bars, two of which are wide.

The location of wide bars in the group determines which character is encoded; spaces are insignificant. Only numeric characters (0 to 9) and START/STOP characters may be encoded.

Discrete Code. A bar code or symbol in which the spaces between characters (intercharacter gaps) are not part of the code.

DRAM. Dynamic random access memory.

E

EAN. European Article Number. This European/International version of the UPC provides its own coding format and symbology standards. Element dimensions are specified metrically. EAN is used primarily in retail.

Element. Generic term for a bar or space.

Encoded Area. Total linear dimension occupied by all characters of a code pattern, including start/stop characters and data.

ENQ (RS-232). ENQ software handshaking is also supported for the data sent to the host.

ESD. Electro-Static Discharge

Glossary - 4 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

F

Flash Disk. An additional megabyte of non-volatile memory for storing application and configuration files.

Flash Memory. Flash memory is responsible for storing the system firmware and is non-volatile. If the system power is interrupted the data is not be lost.

FTP. See File Transfer Protocol .

H

Hard Reset. See Cold Boot .

Host Computer. A computer that serves other terminals in a network, providing such services as computation, database access, supervisory programs and network control.

Hz. Hertz; A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second.

I

IDE. Intelligent drive electronics. Refers to the solid-state hard drive type.

IEC. International Electrotechnical Commission. This international agency regulates laser safety by specifying various laser operation classes based on power output during operation.

IEC 60825-1 Class 1. This is the lowest power IEC laser classification.

IEEE Address. See MAC Address .

Input/Output Ports. I/O ports are primarily dedicated to passing information into or out of the terminal’s memory. Series

9000 mobile computers include Serial and USB ports.

Intercharacter Gap. The space between two adjacent bar code characters in a discrete code.

Interleaved 2 of 5. A binary bar code symbology representing character pairs in groups of five bars and five interleaved spaces. Interleaving provides for greater information density. The location of wide elements (bar/spaces) within each group determines which characters are encoded. This continuous code type uses no intercharacter spaces. Only numeric (0 to 9) and START/STOP characters may be encoded.

Interleaved Bar Code. A bar code in which characters are paired together, using bars to represent the first character and the intervening spaces to represent the second.

Interleaved 2 of 5. A binary bar code symbology representing character pairs in groups of five bars and five interleaved spaces. Interleaving provides for greater information density. The location of wide elements (bar/spaces) within each group determines which characters are encoded. This continuous code type uses no intercharacter spaces. Only numeric (0 to 9) and START/STOP characters may be encoded.

Glossary - 5

I/O Ports. interface The connection between two devices, defined by common physical characteristics, signal characteristics, and signal meanings. Types of interfaces include RS-232 and PCMCIA.

IOCTL. Input/Output Control.

IP Address. (Internet Protocol address) The address of a computer attached to an IP network. Every client and server station must have a unique IP address. A 32-bit address used by a computer on a IP network. Client workstations have either a permanent address or one that is dynamically assigned to them each session. IP addresses are written as four sets of numbers separated by periods; for example, 204.171.64.2.

IPX/SPX. Internet Package Exchange/Sequential Packet Exchange. A communications protocol for Novell. IPX is Novell’s

Layer 3 protocol, similar to XNS and IP, and used in NetWare networks. SPX is Novell's version of the Xerox SPP protocol.

IS-95. Interim Standard 95. The EIA/TIA standard that governs the operation of CDMA cellular service. Versions include

IS-95A and IS-95B. See CDMA.

K

Key. A key is the specific code used by the algorithm to encrypt or decrypt the data. Also see, Encryption and Decrypting .

L

LASER. Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation.The laser is an intense light source. Light from a laser is all the same frequency, unlike the output of an incandescent bulb. Laser light is typically coherent and has a high energy density.

Laser Diode. A gallium-arsenide semiconductor type of laser connected to a power source to generate a laser beam. This laser type is a compact source of coherent light.

Laser Scanner. A type of bar code reader that uses a beam of laser light.

LCD. See Liquid Crystal Display .

LED Indicator. A semiconductor diode (LED - Light Emitting Diode) used as an indicator, often in digital displays. The semiconductor uses applied voltage to produce light of a certain frequency determined by the semiconductor's particular chemical composition.

Light Emitting Diode. See LED .

Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). A display that uses liquid crystal sealed between two glass plates. The crystals are excited by precise electrical charges, causing them to reflect light outside according to their bias. They use little electricity and react relatively quickly. They require external light to reflect their information to the user.

Glossary - 6 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

M

MIL. 1 mil = 1 thousandth of an inch.

Misread (Misdecode). A condition which occurs when the data output of a reader or interface controller does not agree with the data encoded within a bar code symbol.

N

Nominal. The exact (or ideal) intended value for a specified parameter. Tolerances are specified as positive and negative deviations from this value.

Nominal Size. Standard size for a bar code symbol. Most UPC/EAN codes are used over a range of magnifications (e.g., from 0.80 to 2.00 of nominal).

NVM. Non-Volatile Memory.

O

ODI. See Open Data-Link Interface .

Open Data-Link Interface (ODI). Novell’s driver specification for an interface between network hardware and higher-level protocols. It supports multiple protocols on a single NIC (Network Interface Controller). It is capable of understanding and translating any network information or request sent by any other ODI-compatible protocol into something a NetWare client can understand and process.

Open System Authentication. Open System authentication is a null authentication algorithm.

P

PAN . Personal area network. Using Bluetooth wireless technology, PANs enable devices to communicate wirelessly.

Generally, a wireless PAN consists of a dynamic group of less than 255 devices that communicate within about a 33-foot range. Only devices within this limited area typically participate in the network.

Parameter. A variable that can have different values assigned to it.

PC Card. A plug-in expansion card for laptop computers and other devices, also called a PCMCIA card. PC Cards are

85.6mm long x 54 mm wide, and have a 68 pin connector. There are several different kinds:

• Type I; 3.3 mm high; use - RAM or Flash RAM

• Type II; 5 mm high; use - modems, LAN adaptors

• Type III; 10.5 high; use - Hard Disks

PCMCIA. Personal Computer Memory Card Interface Association. See PC Card .

Glossary - 7

Percent Decode. The average probability that a single scan of a bar code would result in a successful decode. In a well-designed bar code scanning system, that probability should approach near 100%.

PING. (Packet Internet Groper) An Internet utility used to determine whether a particular IP address is online. It is used to test and debug a network by sending out a packet and waiting for a response.

Presentation Mode. Typically used when the digital scanner sits in the scan stand or is mounted on a wall, in this mode, the digital scanner operates in continuous (constant-on) mode, where it automatically decodes a bar code presented in its field of view.

Print Contrast Signal (PCS). Measurement of the contrast (brightness difference) between the bars and spaces of a symbol. A minimum PCS value is needed for a bar code symbol to be scannable. PCS = (RL - RD) / RL, where RL is the reflectance factor of the background and RD the reflectance factor of the dark bars.

Programming Mode. The state in which a scanner is configured for parameter values. See Scanning Mode .

Q

Quiet Zone. A clear space, containing no dark marks, which precedes the start character of a bar code symbol and follows the stop character.

QWERTY. A standard keyboard commonly used on North American and some European PC keyboards. “QWERTY” refers to the arrangement of keys on the left side of the third row of keys.

R

RAM. Random Access Memory. Data in RAM can be accessed in random order, and quickly written and read.

Reflectance. Amount of light returned from an illuminated surface.

Resolution. The narrowest element dimension which is distinguished by a particular reading device or printed with a particular device or method.

RF. Radio Frequency.

ROM. Read-Only Memory. Data stored in ROM cannot be changed or removed.

Router. A device that connects networks and supports the required protocols for packet filtering. Routers are typically used to extend the range of cabling and to organize the topology of a network into subnets. See Subnet .

RS-232. An Electronic Industries Association (EIA) standard that defines the connector, connector pins, and signals used to transfer data serially from one device to another.

Glossary - 8 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

S

Scan Area. Area intended to contain a symbol.

Scanner. An electronic device used to scan bar code symbols and produce a digitized pattern that corresponds to the bars and spaces of the symbol. Its three main components are: 1) Light source (laser or photoelectric cell) - illuminates a bar code,; 2) Photodetector - registers the difference in reflected light (more light reflected from spaces); 3) Signal conditioning circuit - transforms optical detector output into a digitized bar pattern.

Scanning Mode. The scanner is energized, programmed and ready to read a bar code.

Scanning Sequence. A method of programming or configuring parameters for a bar code reading system by scanning bar code menus.

SDK. Software Development Kit

Self-Checking Code. A symbology that uses a checking algorithm to detect encoding errors within the characters of a bar code symbol.

Shared Key. Shared Key authentication is an algorithm where both the AP and the MU share an authentication key.

SHIP. Symbol Host Interface Program.

SID. System Identification code. An identifier issued by the FCC for each market. It is also broadcast by the cellular carriers to allow cellular devices to distinguish between the home and roaming service.

Soft Reset. See Warm Boot .

Space. The lighter element of a bar code formed by the background between bars.

Specular Reflection. The mirror-like direct reflection of light from a surface, which can cause difficulty decoding a bar code.

Standard Trigger Mode. The digital scanner uses this mode when out of scan stand or removed from the wall mount. In this mode, aim the digital scanner at a bar code and pull the trigger to decode.

Start/Stop Character. A pattern of bars and spaces that provides the scanner with start and stop reading instructions and scanning direction. The start and stop characters are normally to the left and right margins of a horizontal code.

STEP. Symbol Terminal Enabler Program.

Subnet. A subset of nodes on a network that are serviced by the same router. See Router .

Subnet Mask. A 32-bit number used to separate the network and host sections of an IP address. A custom subnet mask subdivides an IP network into smaller subsections. The mask is a binary pattern that is matched up with the IP address to turn part of the host ID address field into a field for subnets. Default is often 255.255.255.0.

Substrate. A foundation material on which a substance or image is placed.

SVTP. Symbol Virtual Terminal Program.

Symbol. A scannable unit that encodes data within the conventions of a certain symbology, usually including start/stop characters, quiet zones, data characters and check characters.

Glossary - 9

Symbol Aspect Ratio. The ratio of symbol height to symbol width.

Symbol Height. The distance between the outside edges of the quiet zones of the first row and the last row.

Symbol Length. Length of symbol measured from the beginning of the quiet zone (margin) adjacent to the start character to the end of the quiet zone (margin) adjacent to a stop character.

Symbology. The structural rules and conventions for representing data within a particular bar code type (e.g. UPC/EAN,

Code 39, PDF417, etc.).

T

TCP/IP. (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) A communications protocol used to internetwork dissimilar systems. This standard is the protocol of the Internet and has become the global standard for communications. TCP provides transport functions, which ensures that the total amount of bytes sent is received correctly at the other end.

UDP is an alternate transport that does not guarantee delivery. It is widely used for real-time voice and video transmissions where erroneous packets are not retransmitted. IP provides the routing mechanism. TCP/IP is a routable protocol, which means that all messages contain not only the address of the destination station, but the address of a destination network. This allows TCP/IP messages to be sent to multiple networks within an organization or around the world, hence its use in the worldwide Internet. Every client and server in a TCP/IP network requires an IP address, which is either permanently assigned or dynamically assigned at startup.

Telnet. A terminal emulation protocol commonly used on the Internet and TCP/IP-based networks. It allows a user at a terminal or computer to log onto a remote device and run a program.

Terminal Emulation. A “terminal emulation” emulates a character-based mainframe session on a remote non-mainframe terminal, including all display features, commands and function keys. The VC5000 Series supports Terminal Emulations in 3270, 5250 and VT220.

Terminate and Stay Resident (TSR). A program under DOS that ends its foreground execution to remain resident in memory to service hardware/software interrupts, providing background operation. It remains in memory and may provide services on behalf of other DOS programs.

TFTP. (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) A version of the TCP/IP FTP (File Transfer Protocol) protocol that has no directory or password capability. It is the protocol used for upgrading firmware, downloading software and remote booting of diskless devices.

Tolerance. Allowable deviation from the nominal bar or space width.

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. See TCP/IP.

Trivial File Transfer Protocol. See TFTP.

TSR. See Terminate and Stay Resident .

Glossary - 10 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

U

UDP. User Datagram Protocol. A protocol within the IP protocol suite that is used in place of TCP when a reliable delivery is not required. For example, UDP is used for real-time audio and video traffic where lost packets are simply ignored, because there is no time to retransmit. If UDP is used and a reliable delivery is required, packet sequence checking and error notification must be written into the applications.

UPC. Universal Product Code. A relatively complex numeric symbology. Each character consists of two bars and two spaces, each of which is any of four widths. The standard symbology for retail food packages in the United States.

V

Visible Laser Diode (VLD). A solid state device which produces visible laser light.

W

Warm Boot. A warm boot restarts the mobile computer by closing all running programs. All data that is not saved to flash memory is lost.

Index

Numerics

123Scan2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

2D bar codes

aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80 aztec inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

code 128 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75

data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76

data matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

microPDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

microQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

QR inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

A

accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 interface cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 advanced data formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

aiming options

hand-held decode aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30, 4-31

snapshot aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 snapshot mode timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

video view finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7, 5-7

enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30, 4-31

orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7, 2-8

ASCII values

keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

B

bar codes

Australia post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Australia post format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80 aztec inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

beep after good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

beeper tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

beeper volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11, 4-13

bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15, 5-18

bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9

bookland ISBN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

buffering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34, 10-35

cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2

Chinese 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

codabar CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

codabar lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

codabar NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 code 11 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

code 128 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75

code 128 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

transmit buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

code 39 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

code 39 full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

code 39 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

code 39 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 code 93 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

composite CC-A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 composite CC-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

composite TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

continuous bar code read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Index - 2 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

convert GS1 databar to UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . 10-70

convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

coupon report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

crop to address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76

data matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

decode pager motor enable . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-8

decode session timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

direct part marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

DPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

EAN zero extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

EAN-13/JAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9

EAN-8/JAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

flush macro buffer/abort macro

PDF entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85

FN1 substitution values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51

fuzzy 1D processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

GS1 databar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

GS1 databar expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

GS1 databar limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

GS1 databar omnidirectional . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

GS1-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

hand-held decode aiming pattern . . . . . . .4-30, 4-31

hands-free mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

I 2 of 5 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

I 2 of 5 convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

I 2 of 5 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

IBM 468X/469X

convert unknown to code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

port address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34, 4-35, 5-5

image brightness (target white) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

image cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

image enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

image file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14, 5-17

image resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

inverse 1D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

ISBT concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-28, 10-29

ISBT concatenation redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

ISSN EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Japan postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

JPEG image options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

JPEG quality and size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

JPEG target file size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

keyboard wedge

alternate numeric keypad emulation . . . . . . . 9-8

caps lock on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

country keyboard types (country codes) . . . . 9-5

default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

ignore unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

intra-keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Korean 3 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

low exposure priority for snapshot mode . . . . . . . 5-6 low gain priority for snapshot mode . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

matrix 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

matrix 2 of 5 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

matrix 2 of 5 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

microPDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

microQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

MSI check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

MSI check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

MSI lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

MSI transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

multicode mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36, 4-39

Netherlands KIX code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

numeric bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2

pager motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

parameter scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

PDF prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

PDF prioritization timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

picklist modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

prefix/suffix values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

presentation mode field of view . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

presentation performance mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

QR inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

RS-232

baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

beep on bel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

check receive errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

hardware handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11, 7-12

host serial response time-out . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

intercharacter delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

RTS line state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

software handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13, 7-14

stop bit select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Index - 3

samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

scan data options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50

set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

signature capture height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 signature capture JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 signature capture width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

snapshot aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 snapshot mode timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

suppress power-up beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

symbologies

default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

GS1 DataBar limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

time delay to low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

time delay to presentation idle mode . . . . . . . . 4-16

time delay to presentation sleep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18, 4-19

timeout between decodes, different symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 timeout between decodes, same symbol . . . . . 4-29

transmit code ID character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

transmit matrix 2 of 5 check digit . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

transmit no read message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

transmit UK postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

transmit US postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

trigger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-10

UCC coupon extended code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

UID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53

UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

UPC composite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

UPC/EAN

coupon code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

supp redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13, 10-14

UPC/EAN/JAN

supplemental AIM ID format . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

supplemental redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

UPC-A/E/E1 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . .10-14, 10-15

UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

UPU FICS postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

US planet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

USB

caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

country keyboard types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

device type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

polling interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5, 6-13, 6-14

quick emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

SNAPI handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

static CDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail . . . . . . . 10-66

video image size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 video view finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

beeper

suppress power-up beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

beeper definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

bullets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

C

cables

installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 1-5 removing cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

character sets

keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

codabar bar codes

CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

code 11 bar codes

code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

code 128 bar codes

code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

GS1-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

ISBT concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28, 10-29

ISBT concatenation redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

code 128 emulation bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75

code 39 bar codes

buffering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34, 10-35

check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

code 93 bar codes

code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

code ID character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

code identifiers

AIM code IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

modifier characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

composite bar codes

Index - 4 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

composite CC-A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 composite CC-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

composite TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

UPC composite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

connecting

IBM 468X/469X interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

keyboard wedge interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

RS-232 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

conventions

notational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8, 5-9

D

data matrix bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76

default parameters

IBM 468X/469X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

imaging preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

standard default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

direct part marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

discrete 2 of 5 bar codes

discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

DPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

E

exposure options

gain / exposure priority for snapshot mode . . . . . 5-6

illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34, 4-35, 5-5

presentation mode field of view . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

G

gain / exposure priority for snapshot mode . . . . . . . . 5-6

GS1 DataBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

GS1 databar

convert GS1 databar to UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . 10-70

H

host types

keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

I

IBM 468X/469X

connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34, 4-35, 5-5

image brightness (target white) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

image cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8, 5-9

image enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

image options

bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8, 5-9

file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14, 5-17

image brightness (target white) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

image enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

image resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

JPEG image options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

JPEG size/quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

JPEG target file size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

image resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

imaging preferences parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes

check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

J

JPEG image options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

size/quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

JPEG target file size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

K

keyboard wedge

connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Korean 3 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

L

LED definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

M

macro PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85 flush buffer/abort PDF entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85

maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

matrix 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Index - 5

check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

maxicode bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

microPDF417 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Motorola enterprise mobility support . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii

MSI bar codes

check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

N

notational conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

P

parameters

decode pager motor enable . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-8

parts diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

PDF417 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

PDF prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

pinouts

scanner signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

postal codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

Australia post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Australia post format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Japan postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

Netherlands KIX code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

transmit UK postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

transmit US postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

UPU FICS postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

US planet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail . . . . . . . 10-66

power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

presentation mode field of view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

Q

QR code bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

R

RS-232

connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4, 7-6

S

sample bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

scanning

aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2, 5-2, 10-2

hand-held . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 presentation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

sequence example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2, 5-2, 10-1

service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xviii

setup

connecting a USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

connecting an RS-232 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

connecting keyboard wedge interface . . . . . . . . . 9-2

connecting power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

connecting to an IBM 468X/469X host . . . . . . . . 8-2

installing the cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

file format selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

snapshot mode timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

standard default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xviii

symbology default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

T

technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

U

unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

UPC/EAN bar codes

bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9

bookland ISBN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14, 10-15

convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

coupon report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

EAN zero extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

EAN-13/JAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9

EAN-8/JAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

ISSN EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

UCC coupon extended code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Index - 6 DS3508 Product Reference Guide

UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

USB

UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

user preferences parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

V

video view finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 image size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Tell Us What You Think...

We’d like to know what you think about this Manual. Please take a moment to fill out this questionnaire and fax this form to: (631) 627-7184, or mail to:

Zebra Technologies Corporation

Lincolnshire, IL U.S.A.

Holtsville, NY 11742-1300

Attention: Advanced Data Capture

Technical Publications Manager important If you need product support, please call the appropriate customer support number provided. Unfortunately, we cannot provide customer support at the fax number above.

Manual Title:___________________________________________

(please include revision level)

How familiar were you with this product before using this manual?

Very familiar Slightly familiar Not at all familiar

Did this manual meet your needs? If not, please explain.

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

What topics need to be added to the index, if applicable?

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

What topics do you feel need to be better discussed? Please be specific.

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

What can we do to further improve our manuals?

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

Thank you for your input—We value your comments.

Zebra Technologies Corporation, Inc.

Lincolnshire, IL 60069, U.S.A.

http://www.zebra.com

Zebra and the stylized Zebra head are trademarks of ZIH Corp., registered in many jurisdictions worldwide. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

© 2017 Symbol Technologies LLC, a subsidiary of Zebra Technologies Corporation. All

Rights Reserved.

72E-124801-11 Revision a - March 2017

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

advertisement

Table of contents